LG Electronics USA L705I PCS GSM Phone User Manual

LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone

UserManual.wiki >

LG Electronics USA >

L705I User Manual >

Users Manual 1 HTML Version

1. Users Manual 1
2. Users Manual 2

Users Manual 1

Part 15.21 statement

" Change or Modifications that are not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void

the user's authority to operate the equipment. "

Part 15.105 statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation.

This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used

in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. if this

equipment does cause harmful interference or television reception, which can be determined by

turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT

1. WHAT THIS WARRANTY COVERS:

LG offers you a limited warranty that the enclosed subscriber unit and its enclosed accessories will be

free from defects in material and workmanship, according to the following terms and conditions:

(1) The limited warranty for the product extends for ONE (1) year beginning on the data of purchase

of the product.

(2) The limited warranty extends on to the original purchaser of the product and is not assignable or

transferable to any subsequent purchaser/end user.

(3) This warranty is good only to the original purchaser of the product during the warranty period as

long as it is in the U.S., including Alaska, Hawaii, U.S. Territories and Canada.

(4) The external housing and cosmetic parts shall not be covered under these limited warranty terms.

(5) Upon request from LG, the consumer must provide information to reasonably prove the date of

purchase.

(6) The customer shall bear the cost of shipping the product to the Customer Service Department of

LG. LG shall bear the cost of shipping the product back to the consumer after the completion of

service under this limited warranty.

2. WHAT THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER:

(1) Defects or damages resulting from use of the product in other than its normal and customary

manner.

(2) Defects or damages from abnormal use, abnormal conditions, improper storage, exposure to

moisture or dampness, unauthorized modifications, unauthorized connections, unauthorized repair,

misuse, neglect, abuse, accident, alteration, improper installation, or other acts which are not the

fault of LG, including damage caused by shipping blown fuses spills of food or liquid.

(3) Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material or workmanship.

(4) That the Customer Service Department at LG was net notified by consumer of the alleged defect

or malfunction of the product during the applicable limited warranty period.

(5) Products which have had the serial number removed or made illegible.

(6) The limited warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, express or implied either in fact or by

operations law, statutory or otherwise, including, but limited to any implied warranty of

marketability or fitness for a particular use.

(7) Damage resulting from use of non-LG approved accessories.

(8) All plastic surfaces and all other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to

normal customer use.

(9) Products operated outside published maximum ratings.

(10) Products used or obtained in a rental program.

(11) Consumables (such as fuses).

3. STATE LAW RIGHTS:

No other express warranty is applicable to this product. THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED

WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY, IS LIMITED

TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN. LG INFOCOMM INC. SHALL

NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF THE USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS

OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES, DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL, RISING OUT OF THE USE OF,

OR INABILITY TO USE, THIS PRODUCT OR FOR ANY BREACH OF ANY EXPRESS OR

IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MARKETABILITY

APPLICABLE TO THIS PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusive of imitation of incidental

or consequential damages or limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts; so these limitations or

exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have

other rights which vary from state to state.

4. HOW TO GET WARRANTY SERVICE:

To obtain warranty service, please call the following web address:

www.lgeservice.com

For Your Safety

Important Information

This user guide contains important information on the use and

operation of this phone. Please read all the information

carefully for optimal performance and to prevent any damage

to or misuse of the phone. Any changes or modifications not

expressly approved in this user guide could void your warranty

for this equipment.

Before You Start

Safety Instructions

WARNING! To reduce the possibility of electric shock, do not

expose your phone to high humidity areas, such as the

bathroom, swimming pool, etc.

Always store your phone away from heat. Never store your

phone in settings that may expose it to temperatures less than

32°F or greater than 104°F, such as outside during extreme

weather conditions or in your car on a hot day. Exposure to

excessive cold or heat will result in malfunction, damage

and/or catastrophic failure.

Be careful when using your phone near other electronic

devices. RF emissions from your mobile phone may affect

nearby in adequately shielded electronic equipment. You

should consult with manufacturers of any personal medical

devices such as pacemakers and hearing aides to determine if

they are susceptible to interference from your mobile phone.

Turn off your phone in a medical facility or at a gas station.

Never place your phone in a microwave oven as this will

cause the battery to explode.

IMPORTANT! Please read the TIA SAFETY INFORMATION on

page 78 before using your phone.

Safety Information

Read these simple guidelines. Breaking the rules may be

dangerous or illegal. Further detailed information is given in this

user guide.

]Never use an unapproved battery since this could damage

the phone and/or battery and could cause the battery to

explode.

]Never place your phone in a microwave oven as it will

cause the battery to explode.

]Do not dispose of your battery by fire or with hazardous or

flammable materials.

]Make sure that no sharp-edged items come into contact

with the battery. There is a risk of this causing a fire.

]Store the battery in a place out of reach of children.

]Be careful that children do not swallow any parts such as

rubber plugs (earphone, connection parts of the phone,

etc.). This could cause asphyxiation or suffocation.

For Your Safety

]Unplug the power cord and charger during lightning storms

to avoid electric shock or fire.

]When riding in a car, do not leave your phone or set up the

hands-free kit near to the air bag. If wireless equipment is

improperly installed and the air bag is activated, you may be

seriously injured.

]Do not use a hand-held phone while driving.

]Do not use the phone in areas where its use is prohibited.

(For example: aircraft).

]Do not expose the battery charger or adapter to direct

sunlight or use it in places with high humidity, such as a

bathroom.

]Never store your phone in temperatures less than- 4°F or

greater than 122°F.

]Do not use harsh chemicals (such as alcohol, benzene,

thinners, etc.) or detergents to clean your phone. There is a

risk of this causing a fire.

]Do not drop, strike, or shake your phone severely. Such

actions may harm the internal circuit boards of the phone.

]Do not use your phone in high explosive areas as the phone

may generate sparks.

]Do not damage the power cord by bending, twisting, pulling,

or heating. Do not use the plug if it is loose as it may cause

a fire or electric shock.

]Do not place any heavy items on the power cord. Do not

allow the power cord to be crimped as it may cause fire or

electric shock.

]Do not handle the phone with wet hands while it is being

charged. It may cause an electric shock or seriously

damage your phone.

]Do not disassemble the phone.

]Do not place or answer calls while charging the phone as it

may short-circuit the phone and/or cause electric shock or

fire.

]Only use the batteries, antennas, and chargers provided by

LG. The warranty will not be applied to products provided by

other suppliers.

]Only authorized personnel should service the phone and its

accessories. Faulty installation or service may result in

accidents and consequently invalidate the warranty.

]Do not hold or let the antenna come in contact with your

body during a call.

]An emergency call can be made only within a service area.

For an emergency call, make sure that you are within a

service area and that the phone is turned on.

For Your Safety

FCC RF Exposure Information

WARNING! Read this information before operating the phone.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications (FCC) of he United

States, with its action in Report and Order FCC 96-326, adopted

an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio

frequency (RF) electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC

regulated transmitters. Those guidelines are consistent with

the safety standard previously set by both U.S. and

international standards bodies.

The design of this phone complies with the FCC guidelines and

these international standards.

CAUTION

Use only the supplied and approved antenna. Use of

unauthorized antennas or modifications could impair call

quality, damage the phone, void your warranty and/or result in

violation of FCC regulations. Do not use the phone with a

damaged antenna. If a damaged antenna comes into contact

with skin, a minor burn may result. Contact your local dealer

for a replacement antenna.

Body-worn Operation

This device was tested for typical body-worn operations with

the back of the phone kept 0.79 inches (2cm) between the

user’s body and the back of the phone. To comply with FCC RF

exposure requirements, a minimum separation distance of 0.79

inches(2cm) must be maintained between the user's body

and the back of the phone. Third-party belt-clips, holsters, and

similar accessories containing metallic components should not

be used. Body-worn accessories that cannot maintain 0.79

inches(2cm) separation distance between the user's body

and the back of the phone, and have not been tested for typical

body-worn operations may not comply with FCC RF exposure

limits and should be avoided.

For Your Safety

Vehicle Mounted External Antenna

(optional, if available)

A minimum separation distance of 8 inches (20cm) must be

maintained between the user/bystander and the vehicle

mounted external antenna to satisfy FCC RF exposure

requirements. For more information about RF exposure, visit

the FCC website at www.fcc.gov

FCC Part 15 Class B Compliance

This device and its accessories comply with part 15 of FCC

rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device and its accessories may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device and its accessories must

accept any interference received, including interference that

may cause undesired operation.

Cautions for Battery

]Do not disassemble.

]Do not short-circuit.

]Do not expose to high temperature: 60°C (140°F).]

]Do not incinerate.

Battery Disposal

]Please dispose of your battery properly or bring to your

local wireless carrier for recycling.

]Do not dispose in fire or with hazardous or flammable

materials.

Adapter (Charger) Cautions

]Using the wrong battery charger could damage your phone

and void your warranty.

]The adapter or battery charger is intended for indoor use

only.

Do not expose the adapter or battery charger to direct sunlight

or use it in places with high humidity, such as the bathroom.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Main Features of the FOMA L705i

FOMA is the name of the DoCoMo service based on W-CDMA technology, and one of the

world's standards for third-generation (3G) mobile telecommunications (under the IMT-2000

standard).

Incredible Services of i-mode

i-mode is an online service that enables you to get useful information from i-mode programs

or web sites that support i-mode using an i-mode-enabled handset. This service also enables

you to send and receive mail messages with great ease.

䂹Main Features of the FOMA L705i䂹

䂓i-mode mail/Deco-mail/

Deco-mail pictogram→P158

As well as sending text messages, you can

send binary attachments such as JPEG

images, up to 10 different files otherwise a

total size of 2MB at a time. Besides, FOMA

supports Deco-mail and Deco-mail

pictogram for rich and various way to

express you by editing body text color, text

size, or wallpapers.

䂓i-appli/i-appli DX→P184

You can download i-appli programs which

have different functions, ranging from being

fun games, to providing weather reports

and even giving the latest stock quotes.

Also, you can link i-appli DX software to the

information inside the i-mode handset such

as the Phonebook entries and mail

messages so that you can have further fun

with i-appli software.

䂓Chaku-Uta Full®→P220

Chaku-Uta-Full® is a service which you can

download entire songs from music

distribution sites. You can play them back

or set them as your ringtone after

downloading.

䂓International Roaming→P270

Voice calls, video calls, i-mode, i-mode

mail, SMS, and network services are

available with the same FOMA handset,

phone number and mail address used in

Japan even when overseas (in 3G, GSM/

GPRS areas).

䂹An Abundance of Network Services䂹→P256

䊶Voice Mail Services (Charged)䋪䊶Call Waiting (Charged)䋪

䊶Nuisance Call Blocking (Free)䋪䊶Call forwarding (Free)䋪

䊶Dual Network Service (Charged)䋪䊶Caller ID Request (Free)䋪

䊶Multi number (Charged)䋪䊶SMS (Short Message Service) (Free)

䋪 : These services require a separate subscription.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

䂹Your FOMA L705i's Various Functions䂹

䂓Beautiful Glossy Finish

Its glossy and beautiful finish gives it an

extraordinarily elegant feels.

䂓Vibrated Touchpad that

Responds to Graceful Contact

→P26, P29

Your handset's touchpad is designed to

respond to light, graceful touches. The

handset vibration shows that your key

touch worked.

䂓LED Keys

Keys in the Touchpad are illuminated in

bright red

䂓Motion dialing that allows you to

change the design of the Dialing

screen →P101

You can select from digital and painting

designs and also can change the color of

the entered digits.

䂓Dialing quick search allows you to

find a phone number with few

steps →89

You can find a saved phone number in the

Phonebook by entering the memory

number (within 2 digits) or a part of the

phone number (3 digits or more) from the

Stand-by screen.

䂓Camera Functions→P124

Still images (with auto focus) and videos

can be captured using either the Outer

camera or Inner camera. Outer camera has

an effective resolution of 1.94 Mega pixels

(and a recording resolution of 1.92 Mega

pixel) while Inner camera has an effective

resolution of 320 Kilo pixels (recording

resolution of 300 Kilo pixel).

䂓Multiaccess/Multitask→P230

Supports Multiaccess to make i-mode or

text messaging available during a voice

call.

Supports Multitask that enables you to use

several functions simultaneously.

䂓Infrared Communication/Infrared

Remote Control →P211

Besides data exchange through infrared

communication, appliances like the

television can be controlled through infrared

remote control.

䂓microSD Memory Card Support

→P206

Music and pictures can be stored in light

and compact microSD memory cards, thus

it allows data exchange with PC.

䂓World Clock →P240

Allows you to check the date and time in

Cities in each country as well as mean time.

You can check not only date and time but

also the location of the desired city/region

concurrently using the on-screen world

map. It is useful for checking the date, time,

and location there, on the way to the next

destination in your travel...etc.

䂓Barcode Reader →P134

By scanning barcodes or QR codes through

the camera, you can access or send mails

to the corresponding websites or email

addresses.

䂓Function to read out the entered

numbers with Dial keys →P96

The numbers of the Dial keys pressed for

making a call can be read.

The language to read can be selected from

Japanese, English or Korean.

䂓Animation →P200

You can create an animation concatenating

up to 20 still images saved on the FOMA

handset and display them in a slide show.

䂓Characters for Phonebook entries

→P77

In addition to a still image, video or i-motion

movie, you can set a character image, that

allows you to combine a face, hair style,

clothing, and background, to a Phonebook

entry.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Making Full Use of the L705i

䂹Video Phone䂹→P50

You can have a face-to-face conversation with a partner, even if he/she is far away. By

default, the other party's voice can be heard from the speaker during video call. So you can

start it right away.

䂹i-Channel䂹→P154

䋪

This fee-based service requires a separate subscription.

Provides graphical view of information such as news or weather forecasts.

Also, you can obtain more rich-content generated in Flash(P197) by selecting your favorite

channel from the Channel List.

䂹FOMA High Speed䂹→P188

Supports high speed data transfer at the maximum rate of 3.6Mbps for

receiving and 384Kbps for sending within the FOMA High Speed Area.

You can check whether you are within a High Speed Area using "FOMA

ㅢାⅣႺ⏕⹺䉝䊒䊥 (FOMA connection environment check

application)".

The other

party’s display Your display

Before subscribing

to the service

After the service subscription procedures have been completed

(Connect)

(One second

or longer)

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

䂹Music Channel䂹→P216

䋪

This is a fee-based service requiring a separate subscription.

This service allows reserved music program delivery to be automatically

downloaded at night. Programs are periodically updated, and you can

enjoy the downloaded content for up to one hour whenever you want.

䂹Music Player䂹→P220

You can use a PC to save songs downloaded from a music download

service site or copied from a music CD to a microSD memory card, and

then play the songs on the FOMA handset. You can also download an

entire song compatible with Chaku-Uta-Full® from a download service

site and play it.

Also, the handset offers Music player skins of 5 screen designs for the

Playback screen, and Music life that allows you to set the sound quality,

sound volume and the playback duration in line with your usage.

Useful Functions when Using Abroad

䂓Unit Converter →P241

Units for currency, area, length, weight, temperature, volume, and speed

can all be quickly converted back and forth. For example, you can find

out how much the purchase you made abroad costs in Japanese Yen.

䂓Dual Clock Display →P100

On the Stand-by display, you can simultaneously show the time in two

different cities. For example, you can output the city you are traveling to,

and see the time difference.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Safety Precautions (ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE

PRECAUTIONS)

䃂Before using your FOMA handset, read these "Safety Precautions" carefully so that you can use

it correctly. After reading the safety precautions, keep this manual in a safe place for later

reference.

䃂These precautions are intended to protect you and others around you. Read and follow them

carefully to avoid injury, damage to the product or damage to property.

䂓The signs below indicate the levels of danger or damage that may occur if the particular

precautions are not observed.

䂓The following symbols show specific actions:

䂓"Safety Precautions" are explained in the following 6 sections:

General Precautions for FOMA Handset, Battery Packs, Adapters

(Including the Chargers) and UIM................................................................................................P13

Precautions for the FOMA Handset.............................................................................................P14

Precautions for Battery Packs......................................................................................................P16

Precautions for Adapters (Including the Chargers)......................................................................P17

Precautions for the UIM ...............................................................................................................P18

Notes on Using near Electronics Medical Equipment..................................................................P18

This sign indicates that incorrect handling has a high possibility of

causing death or serious injury.

This sign indicates that incorrect handling poses a risk of causing

death or serious injury.

This sign indicates that incorrect handling poses a risk of causing

injury or damage to the product or property.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

Denotes things not to do (Prohibitions)

Denotes not to disassemble. Denotes not to use where it

could get wet.

Denotes not to touch with wet

hands.

Don't

No disassembly

No liquids

No wet hands

Denotes mandatory instructions (matters that must be complied with).

Denotes to unplug from the outlet.

Unplug

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

General Precautions for FOMA

Handset, Battery Packs, Adapters

(Including the Chargers) and UIM

DANGER

Do not use or leave the FOMA

handset or other devices in

locations subject to high

temperatures, such as near fire, in

direct sunlight or inside a car on a

hot day.

䃂Doing so may cause the battery

pack to leak, overheat, explode or

ignite, the devices to be deformed

or malfunction, lower the

performance or shorten the life.

Also, doing so may cause part of

the case to become hot and

possibly cause burns.

䃂Fire, injury, electric shock or

malfunction may result. The

battery pack may leak, overheat,

explode or catch fire.

Do not get the devices wet.

䃂Contact with the devices to liquids

such as water or pet urine may

cause overheating, electric shock,

fire, malfunction, injury, etc. Be

careful not to use the devices in

areas where they could get wet.

Use only the battery packs and

adapters (including the chargers)

approved by DoCoMo for the FOMA

handset.

䃂Using the devices other than those

specified by NTT DoCoMo may

cause the FOMA handset, battery

pack and other devices to leak,

overheat, explode, ignite or

malfunction.

Battery Pack L03

FOMA AC Adapter 01/02

FOMA Overseas/Domestic AC

Adapter 01

FOMA DC Adapter 01/02

FOMA Dry Cell Battery Adapter 01

Desk Adapter L01

FOMA Auxiliary Charger Adapter 01

FOMA Rechargeable USB cable 01

㶎For information on other compatible

products, contact the DoCoMo

service counter.

WARNING

Do not put the battery pack, FOMA

handset or adapter(including the

charger) in heating appliances such

as microwave ovens, or high

pressure containers.

䃂The battery pack may leak,

overheat, explode or ignite. Also,

the FOMA handset or adapter

(including the charger) may

overheat, smoke or ignite, or the

IC may damage.

Do not throw the FOMA handset or

devices, or subject them to severe

shocks.

䃂The battery pack may leak,

overheat, explode, or ignite. Also,

the devices may malfunction or

catch fire.

Keep conductive foreign objects

(metal, pencil lead, etc.) away from

the charge terminal or external

connector. Do not insert such

objects inside.

䃂Fire or malfunction may result from

a short circuit.

Make sure you have the power

switched off before you are near

flammable gas such as gasoline. Do

not charge near that places. Failure

to do so may catch fire.

If you notice any strange smells,

overheating, discoloration or

warping of the handset,

immediately take the following

actions:

1. Remove the power plug from the outlet

2. Turn the FOMA handset off

3. Remove the battery pack from the

FOMA handset

䃂If you continue to use the handset

or devices in the above mentioned

conditions, it may overheat,

rupture, or ignite; the battery pack

may leak.

Don't

No disassembly

No liquids

Continue on the next page

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

CAUTION

Do not place the FOMA handset or

accessories on unstable locations

such as wobbly tables or slanted

locations.

䃂The FOMA handset or accessories

may fall, resulting in injury or

malfunction.

Do not store the FOMA handset

accessories in humid or dusty

places, or in hot areas.

䃂Malfunction may result.

If children use the FOMA handset or

devices, a guardian should explain

the safety instructions and correct

operations. The guardian should

also make sure that the instructions

are followed during use.

䃂Injury may result.

Keep out of the reach of babies and

infants.

䃂Accidental swallowing or injury

may result.

Pay extra attention when you are

using the FOMA handset for an

extended period of time while it is

connected to the adapter(including

the charger).

The FOMA handset will become

moderately warm. In particular,

when the battery pack is being

charged, or when you are capturing

or playing videos, or making video

calls, or constantly using i-mode

functions, or i-appli functions, the

FOMA handset, and its components

including the adapter (including the

charger) can become warm.

䃂Some people who continuously or

repeatedly touch a hot FOMA

handset may develop rashes,

itching, or eczema depending on

their physical health or existing

medical conditions.

Precautions for the FOMA

Handset

WARNING

Do not use the FOMA handset while

driving a vehicle.

䃂Mobile phone usage during driving

is subject to punishment by law as

of November 1st, 2004. Use the

FOMA terminal after stopping the

vehicle to park in a safe place even

if you are using a hands-free kit.

While driving a vehicle, use the

Public mode or the Voice mail

service.

Do not directly point the Infrared

Port at someone's eyes while

exchanging data using infrared

communication.

䃂Doing so may affect your eyes.

Also, aiming it towards other

infrared devices may interfere with

the operation of these devices.

Do not put the FOMA handset in the

place where it could be affected by

an expanded airbag, e.g. on the

dashboard.

䃂If the airbag expands, the FOMA

handset could hit you and others,

causing accidents such as injury

and the FOMA handset could get

malfunction or damaged.

If you are wearing any imbedded

electronic medical devices, do not

place the FOMA handset in a

pocket close to the location of the

device.

䃂The FOMA handset may cause the

device to fail.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Turn off the FOMA handset in

places where use is prohibited such

as in airplanes or hospitals.

䃂Electronic and electronic medical

appliances may be adversely

affected. If the function which

automatically turns on your FOMA

handset is set, cancel the setting

before turning it off.

If the medical facility has specific

zones where use or possession of

handsets is prohibited, follow

those regulations.

You may be punished for using the

FOMA handset in airplanes, which

is prohibited by law.

While using Handsfree, do not put

the FOMA handset speaker next to

your ear.

䃂Do not point the photo light directly

at someone's eyes at close range.

People who suffer from heart

ailments should be especially

careful about setting vibration and

ring volume levels.

䃂Being startled by alerts from an

incoming call could have effects on

the heart.

If it thunders while using the FOMA

handset outside, immediately turn it

off and move in a safe place.

䃂There is a risk that you may

receive an electrical shock or even

be struck by lighting.

Turn off your FOMA handset in

places near from high-precision

electronics devices or devices

using weak electronic signals.

䃂The FOMA handset may possibly

cause the following devices to

malfunction:

㶎Electronic devices that may be

affected: Hearing aids, implanted

cardiac pacemakers, implanted

defibrillators, other medical

electronic devices, fire alarms,

automatic doors and other

automatically controlled devices. If

you are using an implanted cardiac

pacemaker, implanted defibrillator

or any other electronic medical

device, consult the manufacturer or

retailer of the device for advice

regarding possible effects from

radio waves.

CAUTION

Do not swing the FOMA handset

around.

䃂If you swing the FOMA handset

around by its lanyard, someone

could get hurt or the device could

be damaged.

Do not place the magnetized items

near the FOMA handset.

䃂Information on magnetic media

such as cash cards, credit cards,

telephone cards or floppy disks

may be lost. Otherwise,

malfunction may result.

Electronic devices in some types of

cars can be affected by use of the

FOMA handset.

䃂For safety's sake, do not use the

FOMA handset in such cars.

Itching, rash or eczema may be

caused depending on your physical

conditions or predisposition. If an

abnormality occurs, stop using the

FOMA handset immediately, and

then seek medical attention.

䃂Metals are used for the following

parts:

Be careful not to catch anything

inside the fold of the FOMA handset

when you close it.

䃂You may be accidentally injured or

device may fail.

Do not put anything but a UIM in the

FOMA Card Slot and microSD

Memory Card Slot. Keep water,

foreign objects such as electrical

conductors, volatile liquids, etc.,

out of the FOMA handset.

䃂Otherwise, electrical shock, fire or

malfunction may result.

Part Material Surface

Treatment

Hinge plate on the

back side of the

handset

Stainless steel Coating

Around the Outer

camera Stainless steel Trivalent

chrome

plating

Charge terminal on

the back side Beryllium

copper Rhodium

plating

Continue on the next page

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Precautions for Battery Packs

䂓

You can check the type of battery pack in

your FOMA handset by reading the label

attached to the battery pack.

DANGER

Keep all electrical conductors away

from the battery terminal contacts.

Do not carry or keep the handset

together with accessories made of

metal.

䃂Battery packs may leak, overheat,

rupture or ignite.

Do not use excessive force to insert

the battery pack into the FOMA

handset even when you have

difficulty in inserting it. Also, check

that the battery pack is oriented

correctly when you insert it. Also,

check that the battery pack is

oriented correctly when you insert it.

䃂Battery packs may leak, overheat,

rupture or ignite.

Do not attempt to incinerate battery

packs.

䃂Battery packs may leak, overheat,

rupture or ignite.

Do not puncture the battery pack,

or strike it with a heavy blow.

䃂Battery packs may leak, overheat,

rupture or ignite.

If battery fluid somehow gets into

your eyes, immediately flush your

eyes with clean water and

immediately seek emergency

medical advice.

䃂Do not rub your eyes.

WARNING

If normal charging time has elapsed

but charging does not complete,

stop the charging anyhow.

䃂Battery packs may leak, overheat,

rupture or ignite.

If the battery fluid gets on your skin

or clothes, immediately stop using

the battery pack and rinse with

clean running water.

䃂Failure to do so may cause injury

on your skin.

If you see that battery pack is

leaking, or if it smells bad, stop

using it.

䃂Be sure to keep a leak battery

pack away from open flames since

the battery fluid is highly

inflammable and could ignite or

explode.

CAUTION

After its useful life, a battery pack

should be properly disposed of. Do

not dispose of exhaust batteries

with ordinary household waste.

䃂Battery packs which are not

disposed of properly may burn,

explode or cause environmental

damage. Cover the battery

terminals with a non-conductive

tape and take them to a service

counter such as DoCoMo shop or

dispose of them in accordance

with procedures for disposing of

battery packs set up by your local

authorities.

Description Type

Li-ion Lithium ion battery

Don't

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Precautions for Adapters

(Including the Chargers)

WARNING

Do not use a damaged adapter

(including the charger) or one with a

damaged power cord.

䃂Electric shock, overheating or

ignition may result.

Do not use the AC adapter or

Desktop Holder in places with a

very high level of humidity such as a

bath.

䃂You could suffer an electric shock.

Use the DC adapter only in a

negative (-) ground vehicle. It is not

designed for use in a positive (+)

ground vehicle.

䃂Otherwise, ignition may result.

If you hear thunder, do not touch

the FOMA handset or adapter

(including the charger).

䃂There is a risk that you may

receive an electrical shock or even

be struck by lighting.

Do not short-circuit the Charging

Terminal when the adapter is

plugged into the outlet or cigarette

lighter socket. Also, never touch the

Charging Terminal with fingers or

other bare skin.

䃂Doing so could cause fire,

equipment failure, electric shock or

other injury.

Place the charger or Desktop

Holder on a stable location during

charging. In addition, do not cover

or wrap the charger in cloth or

bedding.

䃂If cooling air is restricted by

wrapping the device, it may

overheat, ignite or fail.

Do not touch the power cord of the

adapter (including the charger), or

the outlet with wet hands.

䃂You could suffer an electric shock.

Use the adapter only with the

specified power source and

voltage.

䃂Failing to do so may result in fire or

malfunction. When you use the

FOMA handset overseas, use the

AC adapter appropriate for the

location.

AC adapter: AC 100V

DC adapter: DC 12V, 24V (only for a

negative ground car)

Available AC adapter overseas:

AC100-240V (plug into a home AC

outlet)

If you below the fuse of the DC

adapter, replace it with the

specified fuse.

䃂The use of an incorrect fuse may

cause fire or malfunction. See the

user's manual supplied with the

adapter for the specified fuse.

Keep the power plug dust-free.

䃂Otherwise, ignition may result.

When plugging the adapter

(including the charger) into an

outlet, plug it in firmly, being careful

not to let it contact with metal

lanyards or the like.

䃂Otherwise, electric shock, a short-

circuit or fire may result.

If you are not planning to use the

AC adapter for a long period of

time, unplug it from the outlet.

䃂Otherwise, electrical shock, fire or

malfunction may result.

If the Adapter gets wet, unplug it

immediately from the outlet or

cigarette lighter socket.

䃂A wet adapter can cause electric

shock, smoke or fire.

Don't

No wet hands

Unplug

Continue on the next page

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

CAUTION

Do not place heavy objects on the

adapter (including the charger) cord

and power cord.

䃂Electric shock or fire may result.

Always hold the adapter (including

the charger) firmly when pulling it

out of the outlet or cigarette lighter

socket.

䃂If you pull on the cord instead of

the adapter or plug, the cord could

come loose or be damaged

resulting in electric shock or fire.

Before cleaning, pull the plug out of

the outlet or cigarette lighter

socket.

䃂You could suffer an electric shock.

Precautions for the UIM

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the edge of

UIM (IC portion) when removing it.

䃂Your hands or fingers may be

injured.

Notes on Using near Electronics

Medical Equipment

䂓

The description below meets "Guideline on

the Use of Radio-communication

Equipment such as Cellular Telephones -

Safeguards for Electronic Medical

Equipment" by the Electromagnetic

Compatibility Conference Japan.

WARNING

Be sure to adhere to the following

regulations inside medical facilities:

䃂Keep the FOMA handset out of

operating rooms (ORs), intensive

care units (ICUs) or coronary care

units (CCUs).

䃂Turn off the FOMA handset in

hospital wards.

䃂Turn off the FOMA handset in

hospital lobbies and corridors if

electrical medical devices could be

nearby.

䃂If the medical facility has specific

zones where use or possession of

handsets is prohibited, follow

those regulations.

䃂If the function which automatically

turns on your FOMA handset is

set, cancel the setting before

turning it off.

Turn off the FOMA handset in

crowded trains or other public

places where implanted cardiac

pacemaker or defibrillator wearers

could be nearby.

䃂Operation of an implanted cardiac

pacemaker or implanted

defibrillator may be affected by

radio waves.

If you use an implanted cardiac

pacemaker or implanted defibrillator,

use the FOMA handset 22cm or more

away from the implanted cardiac

pacemaker or implanted defibrillator.

䃂Operation of an implanted cardiac

pacemaker or implanted

defibrillator may be affected by

radio waves.

Don't

Unplug

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Patients using electronic medical

equipment other than implanted

cardiac pacemakers or implanted

defibrillators (outside medical

facilities for treatment at home, etc.)

should check the influence of radio

waves upon the equipment by

consulting the manufacturer.

䃂Operation of electronic medical

equipment may be affected by

radio waves.

Continue on the next page

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Handling and Care

General Usage Guidelines

䂓

Do not let the equipment get wet.

The FOMA handset, battery pack, adapter

(including the charger) and UIM are not

waterproof. Do not use them in places with

high humidity such as a bath or where rain

may get it wet. If you carry them close to your

body, moisture from sweat may corrode the

internal parts causing a malfunction. Note that

malfunctions deemed to be caused by water

are not covered by the warranty, and may be

impossible to repair. Since these malfunctions

are not under warranty, even when repair is

possible, it will be done at the user's expense.

䂓

Clean the FOMA handset with a dry, soft

cloth (Lens cleaning cloth).

• The Display of the FOMA handset

sometimes has a special coating so that it

is easier to see. If you rub the Display

roughly with a dry cloth, it may be

scratched. Take care of the way of

handling, and use only a dry, soft cloth such

as used for cleaning glasses. If the Display

is left with water drop or stain adhered,

smear may be generated or the coating

may peel off.

• Do not use alcohol, thinner, benzene,

detergent or other solvents for cleaning,

otherwise the printing may be removed or

discoloration may result.

䂓

Occasionally clean the connector terminal

with a dry cotton swab.

If the connector terminal becomes dirty, the

connection may become intermittent because

power disconnects or the battery is not fully

charged. Wipe the connector terminal with a

clean dry cloth or cotton swab.

䂓

Do not place the equipment near air

conditioner outlets.

Condensation may form due to rapid changes

in temperature, and this may corrode internal

parts and cause malfunction.

䂓

Do not use excessive force using the FOMA

handset or the battery pack

If the FOMA handset is inserted to a full bag,

or placed in a pocket and sat on, its LCD and/

or internal PCBs may be damaged or

malfunction. And if external devices are

inserted to the external connector terminal,

the connector may be damaged or

malfunction.

䂓

Do carefully read each manual attached to

the battery pack, adapter, or Desktop

Holder (including the charger).

Precautions for FOMA Handsets

䂓

Avoid extreme temperatures.

The FOMA handset should be used within a

temperature range from 5°C to 35°C and a

humidity range from 45% to 85%.

䂓

The FOMA handset may affect general

phones, televisions or radios, etc. in use

nearby. Use as far as possible from such

appliances.

䂓

Keep a separate record of any information

stored on the FOMA handset and store the

copies in a safe location.

DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for the

loss of any of your data.

䂓

Do not insert the the external devices to

Headphone/Microphone Jack or the

external connector terminal obliquely or do

not pull out with the connector is inserted.

it may cause damage or malfunction.

䂓

It is normal for the FOMA handset to

become warm during use or while charging.

You can continue to use it even if it is warm.

䂓

Do not leave the FOMA handset directly

under the sunlight.

Pixels may become discolored or burn out.

Precautions for Battery Packs

䂓

Battery packs are expendable.

Depending on the use condition, the battery

pack may be inflated as it comes to the end of

its life. This is not a malfunction. Purchase the

battery pack specified in this manual.

䂓

Charge the battery pack in a place with an

ambient temperature of 5

C to 35

䂓

Be sure to charge the battery pack before

you first use the FOMA handset or after you

have not used it for a long time.

䂓

The actual time that a battery pack holds its

charge depends on how the FOMA handset

is used and how close the battery pack is to

the end of its useful life.

䂓

The battery pack may bulge towards the

end of its useful life. This is normal.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

䂓

When you are not using a battery pack,

keep it in a cool dry place away from direct

sunlight.

If you are not planning to use the FOMA

handset for a long time, remove the battery

pack from the FOMA handset after its power

has been completely drained. Keep the

battery pack in its original plastic bag.

䂓

If the battery packs are damaged or

deformed as by dropping the handset,

contact a repair counter.

Precautions for Adapters (Including the

Chargers)

䂓

Charge the battery pack in a place with an

ambient temperature of 5

C to 35

䂓

Charge the battery pack where:

• There is very little humidity, vibration, and

dust.

• There are no general phones, television

sets or radios nearby.

䂓

It is normal for the adapters (including the

chargers) to become warm while using or

charging the FOMA handset. You can

continue to use it even if they become

warm.

䂓

Only use the DC adapter when the car

engine is running.

The car battery could be depleted.

䂓

When using a outlet with a latch

mechanism, observe the precautions that

came with the outlet.

䂓

Do not subject the adapters to sharp

impacts. Also, do not bend the Charging

Terminal and terminal guide.

Malfunction may result.

Precautions for UIMs

䂓

Do not use excessive force to insert/remove

the UIM.

䂓

It is normal for the UIM to become warm

during use. You can continue to use it even

if it becomes warm.

䂓

Note that NTT DoCoMo will not be liable for

malfunctions occurring as the result of

inserting and using a UIM with not

recommended IC card reader/writer.

䂓

Always keep the IC portion of the UIM clean.

䂓

Clean the UIM with a soft, dry cloth (Lens

cleaning cloth).

䂓

Keep a separate record of any information

stored on the UIM and store the copies in a

safe location.

DoCoMo assumes no responsibility for the

loss of any of your data.

䂓

To protect the environment, please bring

the old UIM to a service counter such as

DoCoMo shop.

䂓

Avoid extreme temperatures.

䂓

Do not scratch, touch carelessly or short

circuit the IC portion.

Data loss or malfunction may result.

䂓

Do not drop or give shock to the UIM.

Malfunction may result.

䂓

Do not bend the UIM or put heavy things on

the UIM.

Malfunction may result.

䂓

Do not insert the UIM with labels or stickers

attached.

Malfunction may result.

Camera Handling

If you seriously annoy others when using the

FOMA handset, you may be liable for

prosecution under applicable laws or

regulations (such as the Public Nuisance

Laws).

Cautions

䂓

Never use a modified FOMA handset. Using

a modified device violates the Radio Wave

Law.

The FOMA handset is given a certificate for

conformity of technical standards of specified

radio equipment based on the Radio Wave

Law. To confirm this, the rating sticker on the

FOMA handset has written.

If you modify the internal components of the

FOMA handset by removing screws, the

certificate for conformity of technical

standards becomes void.

Using the handset with the void certificate for

conformity of technical standards violates the

Radio Wave Law.

Please be considerate of other

people's privacy when capturing

and sending pictures using

camera-equipped mobile phones.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Intellectual Property

Issues

Copyrights and Portrait Rights

You have no right to copy, modify, or

distribute the contents such as text, images,

music, or software downloaded from web sites

on the Internet, or images captured by the

cameras of this product without permission

from the copyright except for when the copy or

quote is for personal use that is allowed by the

to capture or record live performances or

exhibitions even for personal use.

Refrain from taking portraits of other persons

and uploading such portraits on websites

without consent, as this violates portrait rights.

Trademarks

䍃

"FOMA", "mova", "i-mode", "i-appli", "i-appli DX",

"WORLD CALL", "WORLD WING" "Public Mode",

"i-melody", "i-area", "i-motion", "i-motion mail",

"Chaku-motion", "Deco-mail", "Chara-den", "i-shot",

"mopera", "mopera U", "sigmarion", "musea", "Dual

Network", "Visualnet", "V-live", "i-Channel", "Short

Mail", "Security Scan", "Message F", "Multi Number",

"Music channel", "DoPa", "IMCS", "Pake-Houdai",

"My DoCoMo", "Family Wide Limit", and the logos of

"FOMA", "i-mode", "i-

㱍

ppli", "WORLD WING", and

"Music Channel" are trademarks or registered

trademarks of NTT DoCoMo, Inc.

䍃The name of the Free Dial Service and its logo

are registered trademarks of NTT

Communications Corporation.

䍃"Multitask" is a trademark of the NEC

Corporation.

䍃"Catch Phone (Call Waiting Service)" is a

registered trademark of the Nippon Telegraph

and Telephone Corp.

䍃McAfee®,䊙䉦䊐䉞䊷® are registered trademarks

or trademarks of McAfee, Inc. and/or its affiliates

in the United States and/or other countries.

䍃Quick Time is a trademark of Apple Computer,

Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

䍃Powered by JBlendTM Copyright

2002-2006 Aplix Corporation. All rights

reserved.

䍃QR code is a registered trademark of

DENSO WAVE Inc.

䍃G GAIDO, G-GUIDE, G GAIDO

MOBAIRU, G-GUIDE MOBILE, and

the G-GUIDE logos are registered

trademarks in Japan of Gemstar-TV

Guide International, Inc. of America or its

affiliates.䇭

䍃This product is preloaded with NetFront from

ACCESS Co., Ltd. as its Internet browser.

NetFront is a registered trademark or trademark

of ACCESS Co., Ltd in Japan and/or the other

countries.

䍃

Contains Adobe

Reader

technology by Adobe

Systems Incorporated

1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software

䍃

Adobe and Adobe Reader are either registered

trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems

Incorporated in the United States and/or other

countries.

䍃Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista are

trademarks or registered trademarks of U.S.

based Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and

other countries.

䍃Other company names or product names

mentioned in this content are the trademarks or

registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Other

䍃Contains Flash® LiteTM‚ and Adobe® Reader®

technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated

Flash Lite and Adobe Reader are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe

Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or

other countries.

䍃A module developed by Independent JPEG

Group is integrated into the software on this

product.

䍃This manual abbreviates operating systems

(Japanese version) as follows:

- Windows Vista is an abbreviation of Windows

Vista

(TM)

(Home Basic, Home Premium,

Business, Enterprise, and Ultimate) operating

system.

- Windows XP is an abbreviation of Microsoft

Windows

XP Professional operating system,

or Microsoft

Windows

XP Home Edition

operating system.

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

- Windows 2000 is an abbreviation of Microsoft

Windows

2000 Professional operating system.

䍃This product is licensed based on the MPEG-4

Patent Portfolio License. If you use MPEG-4

videos for private purpose without any profits,

you are allowed to use them only when:

- Recording MPEG-4 videos that is compliant

with the standard of MPEG-4 Visual.

- Playing back MPEG-4 videos that the

consumers recorded for non-commercial

activities.

- Playing back MPEG-4 videos obtained from the

MPEG-LA licensees.

For details, contact MPEG LA,LLC.

䍃Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under

one or more of the following US Patents and/or

their counterparts in other nations:

4,901,307 5,504,773 5,109,390

5,535,239 5,267,262 5,600,754

5,416,797 5,490,165 5,101,501

5,511,073 5,267,261 5,568,483

5,414,796 5,659,569 5,056,109

5,506,865 5,228,054 5,544,196

5,337,338 5,657,420 5,710,784

5,778,338

Easy Search/Contents/Precautions

Accessories and Main Options

Accessories

Main Options

Other Options →P305

FOMA L705i

(With Warranty and Rear Cover L04)

Battery Pack L03

(With Instruction Manual)

Instruction Manual

㶎See Quick Manual on P343.

CD-ROM for FOMA L705i (accessory)

㶎"Manual for Data Communication" in PDF format

contained.

FOMA AC adapter 01/02

(With Warranty and Instruction Manual)

Desktop Holder L01

(With Instruction Manual)

ขᛒ⺑᣿ᦠ

Before Using the Handset

Part Names and Functions............................................................................................... 26

Display Components ........................................................................................................ 32

Selecting Menu Items ....................................................................................................... 34

Using the UIM (FOMA Card) ............................................................................................. 38

Inserting/Removing the Battery Pack ............................................................................. 41

Charging the Mobile Handset .......................................................................................... 42

Checking the Battery Level ..................................................................... Battery Meter 45

Turn On/Turn Off ....................................................................................... Power On/Off 46

Setting the Date and Time ..................................................................... Set Date&Time 47

Sending Caller ID .........................................................................Caller ID Notification 48

Viewing Your Own Number .......................................................................Own Number 48

Before Using the Handset

Part Names and Functions

aInfrared Port

• When carrying out Infrared communications,

point this towards the other person.→P212

bInner Camera

• Capture your own still image or movie with

camera.→P129, P130

• Capture your own image during video calls.

cDisplay →P32

dTouchpad

Just slide over the illuminated buttons on the

touchpad to operate.→P29

eMMenu Button / Right Soft Key

• Press this in Stand-by to open the Main menu

(P34), and press for 1+ seconds to open the

Custom menu.

• Executes the program indicated for the right soft

key→P31

fKNavigation Button

This is used to move the cursor or scroll through

the screen.

U Up Button

• Move the cursor up.

• Press this in Stand-by to open the Phonebook

list screen (P82), and press for 1+ seconds to

open the Create contact screen (P77).

• Press this while the Music player, etc. is running

to increase the volume.

DDown Button

• Move the cursor down.

• Press this in Stand-by to open the Mail menu

screen (P160), and press for 1+ seconds to

perform the Check new message screen (P168,

P168).

• Press this while the Music player, etc. is running

to reduce the volume.

LLeft Button

• Move the cursor left. Also, return to the previous

screen.

• Press this in Stand-by to open the Received call

screen (P56), and press for 1+ seconds to open

the Received message screen (P178).

RRight Button

• Move the cursor right. Also, go to the next

screen.

• Press this in Stand-by to open the Redial screen

(P54), and press for 1+ seconds to open the

Sent message screen (P178).

gAStart Button

• You can use this to initiate a voice or video call.

→P50, P64

• Press this in the Stand-by display to open your

recent call history, and press this for 1+seconds

in the Stand-by display to open the recent sent/

received mail history.

• When typing, clicking this modify the types of

characters being input.→P248

䂓Front

䊶The antenna is inside the FOMA handset.

䂓Rear 䂓Left side 䂓Right side

Before Using the Handset

hDial Button

• Press to enter a phone number or character.→

P296

•If the "

0" button is pressed for more than

1 second at the Stand-by display, "+" is entered.

→P60

i*Public Mode (Driving Mode) Button

•Press ":" and "䋪".

• If you hold the button for one second at the

Stand-by display, Driving Mode is enabled or

disabled.→P68

jIllumination dot

Turning the backlight on and off during use or

while charging→P105

kEarpiece

The other party's voice comes from here.

lIiMode Button / Right Soft Key

• Press this in Stand-by to open the i-mode menu

screen (P138), and press for 1+ seconds to

open the i-appli list screen→P184

• Executes the program indicated for the right soft

key→P31

• When typing, clicking this modify the types of

characters being input (between Hiragana,

Katakana, Kanji and numeric characters).

→P296

mCConfirmation Button

• Execute the operation.

nQClear Button

• Restore the previous state.

• Press this in Stand-by for 1+ seconds to open

the i-channel list screen.→P155

o#Manner Mode Button

• "#" is entered.

• Press for 1+ seconds on the Stand-by display to

set/ cancel Manner Mode.→P97

pMouthpiece

• During a phone conversation, one's voice is

transmitted through this.

• During a video recording, it serves as a

microphone.

qOuter Camera

• Capture still images or movies of surroundings

with the camera.→P129

• Capture images of surroundings during video

calls.

rPhoto Light

• When taking still pictures or videos, turns on or

off a red light.

sCharging Terminal

tRear Cover

• Remove the rear cover when inserting/removing

the UIM or battery pack .→P38, P41

uSpeaker

• Ringtones, alarm tones, and melodies sound

from here.

• The other party's voice comes from here during

a handsfree call.

vLanyard Hole

wHeadphone/Microphone Jack

You can a connect flat-plug earphone/microphone

with switch (option) here. Please do not forcibly

pull the wire out from the jack.

xFEVolume Key

Use this key to adjust the volume, etc

• Press this in Stand-by or when a call is arriving

to adjust the ring tone volume.

• Press this during a call to adjust the Earpiece

volume.

• Press F for 1+ seconds in Stand-by to activate

or deactivate Manner mode. Press E for 1䋫

seconds to display Record message list screen.

• Press this twice to deactivate Keypad lock when

it is activated䋪(when the FOMA handset is

closed).

䋪 : When "Keypad lock" (P116) is set to "Allow

manual unlock"

• Press this on the Still image/Video capture

screen to switch between the Inner and Outer

cameras.

• Press this on the Playback screen of the Music

player to adjust the playback volume.

• Press this on the Menu screen or List screen to

move the cursor or scroll by screen to the next

screen.

yNMultitask Button

• The task list screen opens (P231).

• If you hold the button for more than a second,

the "New task " menu opens up.→P230

zExternal Connector Terminal

• AC adapter (optional), DC adapter (optional), or

FOMA USB Cable (optional).

APPower/Off Button

• Turn the power on/off.→P46

• Used to end a call, or to stop a function.

BGMusic Button

• The Music menu is displayed.→P221

• If you hold the button for more than a second,

the Music Player menu is displayed.

• This key works as an shutter when pressing on

the Still image/Video capture screen.→P129,

P130

CmicroSD Memory Card Slot

• A spot to insert the microSD memory card.

Before Using the Handset

Opening/Closing your FOMA Handset

When you want to open the FOMA handset, please slide up the display screen. When closing

the phone, please slide down the display screen.

• Closing the FOMA handset automatically activates the Keypad lock, and opening the handset deactivates it.

You can set how to deactivate in "Keypad lock".→P116

Note

• Be careful not to slide the phone roughly, or it could damage the handset.

Before Using the Handset

How to Use the Touchpad

Beneath the display is the touchpad that can be operated by touching it lightly with your

fingers. The FOMA handset vibrates when you use the touchpad. Touchpad keys are available

only while they are illuminated.

• You can set the handset to vibrate or not.→P30

If the touchpad turns off during an operation

When the touchpad is not illuminated, operations using the touchpad become unavailable. Illuminate the

touchpad by performing any of the following steps before performing operations:

When the FOMA handset is open

• Press any dial key or side key

When the FOMA handset is closed

• Open the FOMA handset

• Press the power key or volume key

To vibrate the FOMA handset when you use the touchpad

If you set "Vibration feedback" in "Touchpad settings" to "On", the handset vibrates to indicate the

proper operation.→P95

• The handset may not vibrate depending on the screens such as under the Photo-mode/Movie-mode capture

screen or the barcode reader scan screen, or operations such as using an i-appli.

Notes when Using the Touchpad

The touchpad does not function if:

• The touchpad is not illuminated

• You use an object other than your finger such as a ballpoint pen or pencil

• You wear gloves

• You place a foreign object on the touchpad

Note

• Do not apply any object, such as a label, on top of the operating part of the touch-pad or it may not function

properly.

• Do not use a sharp tipped metal object such as a pen tip because it may cause damage.

• Clean with a dry, soft cloth. If it is very dirty, wipe with a wet cloth. Dry sufficiently before using.

Touchpad

Touchpad illuminated

Before Using the Handset

Vibration feedback settings

Settig Touchpad Vibration

Set whether using the touchpad vibrates the FOMA handset or not.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Others"X"Touchpad settings"X

Vibration feedbackXOn/Off

If this is set to "Off", the FOMA handset does not vibrate when you use the touchpad.

Touchpad sensitivity settings

Set to adjust the touchpad sensitivity.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Others"X"Touchpad settings"

X"Touchpad sensitivity"XSelect a sensitivity

High

䋺Increase the sensitivity of the touchpad.

Standard

䋺Set the sensitivity of the touchpad to normal.

Low

䋺Increase the sensitivity of the touchpad.

Default On

Default Standard

Before Using the Handset

Soft Keys

Available operations on the currently opened screen are displayed as Soft Keys at the bottom

of the screen. Press the following keys on the touchpad to perform functions corresponding to

Soft Keys.

• Different Soft Keys appear depending on the function or display status.

Notation of Soft Key Operations

This manual describes the Soft Key operations as follows.

aOperations performed using Mwill be displayed.

bOperations performed using Cwill be displayed.

• Indicates and displays where Scrolling / Item Selection

is possible.

cIOperations performed with will be displayed. 䉸䊐䊃䉨䊷䉣䊥䉝

䇭䇭

䇭

M[Menu]

䇭 The Button Soft Keys

Before Using the Handset

Display Components

The meanings of the icons appearing at the top of the Display or Sub-display are as follows:

Strong Weak

Radio wave reception level →P46

Self Mode is set →P115

Out of Service Area / No Reception

→P46

bVoice call in progress →P50

TV Call in progress →P50

"Reject all calls" is in progress.→

P119

cToggle

On/Off i-mode Connection engaged →P139

Toggle

On/Off Ongoing i-mode transmission /

i-channel message reception →P139

Toggle

On/Off Engage/Disengage Packet

connection

During Packet Communication

Sending/Receiving Packet Data

Sending packet data

Sending/Receiving pakcet data

d(White)

i-mode mail from i-mode center

→

P167

(Pink) i-mode center mailbox is full

(White) There is a MessageR at the i-mode

Center→P150

(Pink) MessageR at the i-mode Center is full

(White) There is a MessageF at the i-mode

Center→P150

(Pink) MessageF at the i-mode Center is full

a b c d e fg h i j k

l m n o pq r s t u v w x

FED G

CBAzy

(White) There is a i-mode mail and

MessageR/F at the i-mode Center

(Pink) i-mode Mail and Message R/F at

i-mode center is full

e(White) There is an unread i-mode mail at the

i-mode Center→P166

(White) There is an unread SMS→P182

(White) There is an unread i-mode mail and

SMS

(Pink) Handset Mailbox is full

UIM's SMS section is full

Handset Mailbox and UIM SMS

sections are full

f(White) There is an unread MessageR

→P150

(Pink) Handset MessageR section is full

(White) There is an unread MessageF→P150

(Pink) Handset MessageR section is full

gA SSL Page is open→P152

hAn i-appli is running →P185

An i-appli i-appliDX is running →P185

iA task is currently being executed

→P230

Several tasks are currently being

executed

A task is currently being restarted in

the background

Several tasks are currently being

restarted in the background

Alarm has executed while several

tasks are running.

j䌾Battery level →P45

kConfiguring Full-lock →P113

(Pink)

Manner Mode is activated →P97

(Blue)

Original Manner Mode is activated

→P98

mAudio ringer for voice/video call is

active, vibrator is inactive →P94, P95

Audio ringer for voice/video call is

inactive, vibrator is active →P94, P95

Audio Ringer for voice/video call is

active, vibrator is also active →P94,

P95

Audio ringer for voice/video call is

inactive, vibrator is inactive →P94,

P95

Before Using the Handset

Function mark assigned to the touchpad (Show

shortcut icons)

Icons indicating the function assigned to touchpad

navigation key and Q appear on the Stand-by

display by default. For the functions assigned, see

P26.

• You can set not to be displayed.→P99

nMail/message receipt ringer active,

vibrator is inactive→P94, P95

Mail/message receipt ringer inactive,

vibrator is active→P94, P95

Mail/message receipt ringer active,

vibrator is active→P94, P95

Mail/message receipt ringer inactive,

vibrator is inactive→P94, P95

oPublic Mode (Drive Mode) is set

→P68

pModifying Voicemail Settings →P71

qThere is a set alarm →P231

rThere are TO DO activities today

→P232

There are TO DO activities today with

their alarms activated→P231, P232

sInserting microSD Memory Card

→P206

tConfiguring voice/video calls usage

limit→P114

Configuring voice/video calls

reception limit→P114

Configuring voice/video calls usage

and reception limit→P114

uConfiguring Sent Mail limit→P114

Configuring Received Mail limit

→P114

Configuring Sent and Received Mail

limit→P114

vWhen you set "Call/Mail lock" to "On"

→P115

When you set "Secret mode" to "On"

→P117

When you set both "Call/Mail lock"

and "Secret mode" to "On" →P115,

P117

When you set "Secret data only

mode" to "On"→P117

When you set both "Call/Mail lock"

and "Secret data only mode" to "On"

→P115, P117

wConnecting to an external device via

USB cable→P210

xLinking to Terminal

UIM not inserted / UIM has produced

an error→P38

yi-appli automatic execution has failed

→P190

zCall costs have exceeded the limit

→P240

AMusic channel episode download

complete→P216

Music channel episode download

failed→P216

Downloading music channel episode

→P216

BBooking downloading music channel

program→P216

CPattern Data has been updated→

P328

You should update your pattern data

DSeveral Unread Mails (with number of

the mails)

ESeveral Missed Calls(with number of

the calls)

FThere are Voice mail messages(with

number of the calls)→P256

GNew Record message have been

recorded(with number of the

messages)

Note

• Some characters or symbols appearing on the

display may be partially deformed or

abbreviated.

• Icons appearing on the Display are based on

the default settings. Depending on changes to

your settings, the display of the FOMA handset

may appear differently from the illustrations in

the operation manual.

• The Display of the FOMA handset employs

high-precision production technology, however,

there may be instances where there are missing

dots or dots that remain on. This is not a

manufacturing defect.

Before Using the Handset

Selecting Menu Items

On your FOMA handset, you can configure execution settings, perform operations, or save

items through the main menu or sub menu.

Selecting Functions from Main Menu

You can choose a function from the menu by using the navigation buttons or the dial buttons.

䂓Icons and buttons displayed on the Main menu

Menu Icons Corresponding

Dial Key Description

(Mail) 1Select for using i-mode mail and SMS. You can configure settings to use

i-mode mail and SMS.

(i-mode) 2

Select for using i-mode. You can also connecting to the i-menu,

displaying i-channels, confirm i-mode

settings, examine MessageR

(Request) and MessageF (Free) messages, et cetra.

i-appli 3Select for using i-appli. You can view pre-installed i-appli and i-appli

downloaded from sites.

(Phone Book) 4Select for using the Phonebook saved on the FOMA handset or UIM.

(Data box) 5

Select when using Music/Videos/iMotions/Ringtones/SD Audio Data that

has been saved to a microSD memory Card or to the FOMA Handset.

(MUSIC) 6Select when using the music player/SD audio player, or when viewing a

music channel.

(Lifekit) 7Select when using the barcode reader, Receive Ir Data, custom menu

configuration, the Record Message configuration, Stop watch, or other

similar small, useful functions.

(Camera) 8Select when taking pictures or video, or making configuration changes

to the camera.

(Stationary)

Select when using functions related to daily life, such as the schedule,

Alarm, memo, To Do

䊥䉴䊃

, World time, calculator, Unit converter and

Remembering dates.

(Settings) *Select when making configuration changes to your FOMA handset,

such as modifications to sound levels, displayed images (such as the

Stand-by display), time and date settings, international roaming settings

and security-related settings.

(Own number) 0Select this when you need to confirm your own phone number.

(Service) #

Select this when you need to use network changes, such as the

Answering Machine/Voice mail , Call waiting, Call forwarding, Nuisance

call blocking, Caller ID notification, Caller ID request services

Main Menu

Before Using the Handset

Selecting Menu Items

As an example, we explain how to modify "Light" from the Stand-by display.

• This manual explains how to select functions using the navigation buttons as follow:.

aPress the M[Menu] button on the Stand-by display.

Main menu appears.

bAt the main menu, press Kand move the cursor over

(Settings) and press C[Select]

cAt the Settings menu screen, press Hand move the

cursor over "Display" and press C[Select]

dAt the display menu, press Hand move the cursor

over "Light" and press C[Select]

Making a Selection with the Dial Buttons

This section explains the steps for using dial key numbers to open the "Camera Settings"

screen from the main menu, as an example.

aPress the M[Menu] button on the Stand-by display.

bFrom the Main menu screen, press 8that corresponds to the

"Camera" menu.

cFrom the Camera screen, press 4that corresponds to the

"Camera settings".

Settings screen

display screen

Screen

Brightness

Settings

Camera Screen Camera Setting

Screen

Main Menu Screen

Menu number

Continue on the next page

Before Using the Handset

Basic Functions for Each Menu

Returning to the Previous Screen/the Stand-by Display

Press the following keys to return to the previous screen or pause/cancel the operation to

return to the Stand-by display.

•Q䋺Return to the previous menu

•P䋺Returns to the Stand-by display. If a confirmation screen to exit is displayed, press "Yes" to return to the

Stand-by display.

Selecting Setting Items

Option fields for a setting screen show the currently set options. To change a setting, select an

option field and select an item from a list that opens.

• When is displayed to the right and left of an option field, use J to switch items.

Authentication

For certain functions and services, it may be required for confirmation

purposes to enter a password(P110). If the entry screen appears, use the dial

buttons to enter the password and press C[OK]. If correctly entered, you

can complete the function, or continue to use the function.

• The entered password will appear as "䋪" (Asterisk) marks.

Note

• Depending on the operation on the FOMA handset, pressing P䋯Q may not return to the Stand-by

display/the previous screen.

Note

• The settings may not be switched depending on the items.

Note

• To cancel entering the security code and close the entry screen, press M[cancel]

HXCHXC

Password entry

screen (Example:

Security Code

entry screen)

Before Using the Handset

Sub Menu

When "Menu" is displayed on the Soft Key, you can call up the sub menu to perform various

functions.

• The sub menu's display varies depending on the function or your FOMA headset's settings.

䂓About the sub menu on the List Screen

On the sub menu for a list screen, there are some items that apply only to the highlighted item such as "Delete"

and other items that apply all items on the list such as "Delete all" Move the cursor to the item before pressing

M[Menu] when executing an operation that applies to only one item.

Notation for Menu Operation

This manual makes explanations by using steps to be performed mainly from the Stand-by

display. Basically, descriptions of operations are simplified as follows:

Example of Operations

aAn icon to press to operate

An icon on the main menu Use

to move the cursor on the icon and press

[Select]

to select.

cMenu item names. There are situations where it may say "Perform the following operation" or

"select xxx". Press H to move the cursor onto the item and press C[Select] to select.

Sub Menu Example

Items displayed on the sub menu may vary depending on the settings or registration status of

the FOMA handset.

Note

• For items that have a sub menu, move the cursor and press C [Select]/R to view the sub menu.

• Press M[Close]/ Qto close the sub menu

Phone number

entry screen

M[Menu]

Items that have sub menus

Sub menu

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Display"X"Call display"

䇭䇭䇭䇭 a䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭 b䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭䇭

䇭

[Sort]

According to certain situations, the files can be displayed in different fashion.

X"Display name"/"Date"/"Size"/"Source"

[Memory Info]

Handset

memory

External

䋺Display the status of storage space in the "Data box".

䋺Display the status of storage space on the microSD memory

card.

Continue on the next page

Before Using the Handset

aMenu item names. Press H to move the cursor onto the item and press C[Select] to select.

bFunctional description of items.

cOperational description of items. Operate aft er selecting a.

dItem names, function description of items, and operation description of items after the

selection of items.

Notation Rules

䂓Description of steps starting from other than the Stand-by display

At the beginning of the description, the status of the handset or the screen to open such as "Ringing " or "List

screen" is written.

䂓Omitting C[Select] in selection operation

As shown in c in "Example of Operations" (P37), to explain a step to select an icon or a function from a list,

operational steps such as pressing C[Select] are omitted.

Similarly, to explain steps to enter a password or fix entered characters, the operations for fixing such as

C[OK] are omitted.

䂓Omitting C when carrying out a function to make into

The instruction beginning with "Enable xxx checkbox" means that you have to enable the checkbox by

pressing C to turn to shown beside the desired item.

Using the UIM (FOMA Card)

The UIM is an IC card that contains subscription information, such as your phone number. You

can use communication functions including calls, mail, and i-mode communication by inserting

the UIM into the handset. Inserting the UIM into another FOMA handset allows you to operate

multiple FOMA handsets for various purposes.

For details on how to handle the UIM, refer to the UIM instruction manual.

Inserting/Removing the UIM

• After you turned off the handset following the steps described in "Turning the Power Off" (P46), turn the handset

upside down, then remove or insert the battery pack.→P42

• Turn off the FOMA handset and remove the battery pack before inserting or removing the UIM.→P46

Inserting

To insert the UIM, close the FOMA handset and hold it with both hands.

Note

• If multiple sub menus such as the redial list screen and the redial detail screen are collectively described,

some menu items that do not actually appear may be included (depending on the settings or screens).

aInsert the UIM in the direction of the arrow with the IC chip side down

Note

• Do not use excessive force inserting the UIM to avoid damaging it.

Before Using the Handset

Removing

To remove the UIM, close the FOMA handset and hold it with both hands.

Security Code for the UIM

You can assign the security code to the UIM, "PIN1 code" and "PIN2 code".→P111

Operations Restricted by the UIM

The UIM operation restriction function is embedded in the FOMA handset as a security

function the to protect your data and files.

• UIM restrictions will be set automatically to data or files if an i-appli is launched or if the data or files are obtained

in one of the following methods, with the UIM inserted in the FOMA handset:

- Images or melodies downloaded from sites or Web pages

- Site or Web pages saved as Screen memos

- i-mode mail received with attachments

- i-appli launched

• Data, files or applications with UIM restrictions set can be viewed, played, attached to i-mode mail, launched,

sent/received via infrared, or copied to a microSD memory card only when the UIM that was inserted when the

data, files or applications were obtained is inserted. If the UIM that was inserted is replaced with another UIM,

these data and files become unavailable.

• The following data/files are restricted:

- Files attached to i-mode mail

- Files (ringtones / pictures) that are attached to MessageR/Fs.

- Files contained in Screen Memos

- Images inserted in the main text of Deco-mail

- i-motion

-i-appli

- Images (including Flash animations)

- Chaku-Uta®Chaku-Uta-Furu (Downloaded Music)®

- Melody

- Motion-restricted data, including mail templates.

- Music Channel episodes

䋪

"Chaku-Uta" is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc.

aSlide the UIM in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the FOMA Card Slot

Note

• Do not misplace the removed UIM.

Before Using the Handset

䋪Hereafter, the UIM that was inserted when the data or files were obtained is called "your UIM" and any other

UIM is "another UIM".

UIM Types

Please be aware that using your UIM (Blue) will result in different functionalities than using UIM

(Green/White).

Note

• Even if you have set the data/files restricted with this function for the Stand-by display, the settings will revert

to their factory-default settings temporarily if another UIM is inserted (or if no FOMA card is inserted). When

you re-insert your UIM, it will restore the phone to your original settings.

• Pre-installed i-appli programs are not restricted. However, if you delete an i-appli and then download it, the

newly-downloaded i-appli program will be restricted.

• The following data/files are not restricted with this function:

- Data/files obtained by using Infrared communication, the microSD memory card, or data

communications

- Images captured/edited using your FOMA handset

• Even if a different UIM from the time when data/files were obtained is inserted, the data/files restricted with

this function can be deleted.

• Settings that are saved on the UIM are as follows:< (Confirming specs)>

- Phone number display - SMS Center settings - PIN1 and PIN2

- Select language - SMS validity period setting - Setting to enable or disable DoCoMo certificate 1

• If the UIM is inserted into another i-Channel compatible handset, the ticker will not appear. The latest

information is downloaded and ticker is shown after you press Q for 1+ seconds to obtain the channel list.

Function UIM (Blue)

UIM (Green / White)

Reference

The number of digits of a phone number that

can be saved to the UIM contact Up to 20 digits Up to 26 digits P79

World Wing Usage Not available Available P270

Service dialing Not available Available P262

WORLD WING

WORLD WING is DoCoMo's FOMA international roaming service that provides telephone and other types of

mobile communications. It allows the subscriber's phone number to stay constant overseas by inserting the

UIM(green/white) into a FOMA handset or a mobile phone designed for overseas use (W-CDMA or GSM

systems).

• If you subscribed to the FOMA service after September 1, 2005, a separate subscription is not required.

However, if you unsubscribed to the FOMA service subscription or canceled the service, a separate

subscription is required.

• If you initially subscribed to the FOMA service before August 31, 2005 and have not subscribed to

"WORLD WING", a separate subscription is required.

• This service is not available with some billing plans.

• In the case that your UIM (green/white) is lost or stolen overseas, contact DoCoMo immediately and

temporarily suspend your subscription. For contact information, see "DoCoMo Information Center" on the

back of this manual. Call and communication charges apply after the handset was lost or stolen are still

charged to you.

Before Using the Handset

Inserting/Removing the Battery Pack

• Turn off the handset and hold it closed in your hand.

Inserting

aWhile pushing the rear

cover in the direction of the

arrow a, slide the cover in

the direction of arrow b.

Pick up the cover as shown

by arrow c.

bAlign the metal contacts of

the battery pack and the

FOMA handset, attach the

battery pack in the direction

of the arrow a,andinsert

the battery pack in the

direction of the arrow b

䍃When mounting the

battery pack, press it

underneath the tab and

push it down.

Align the tabs for Rear Cover

and while pushing it in the

direction of arrow

, slide it

in the direction of arrow

;

push until you hear a "click"

sound.

Note

• For further details on how to handle the Battery Pack, refer to the Battery Pack L03 instruction manual.

Make sure there

are no gaps

between the

FOMA headset

and the rear

cover.

(Approximately

3mm)

Hold the battery pack with

the product name side up.

Before Using the Handset

Removing

Charging the Mobile Handset

Use the AC adapter (optional), Desk Adapter (optional) or DC adapter (optional) designed for

the handset to charge the FOMA handset. When using the FOMA handset abroad, you must

use the FOMA foreign use AC adapter 01 (sold separately). To make full use of the FOMA

handset, use the Battery Pack L03 exclusively designed for the handset.

䂓Battery pack lifetime

• Battery packs are expendable. As charging is repeated, available time by each charging will gradually

become shorter.

• When the available time of each charging becomes approximately half of that of the time of purchase, it is

recommended to replace the current battery pack with a new one as early as possible. It is normal for the

battery pack to grow in size towards the end of its operational lifetime.

• If the i-appli or video phone functions are used for long periods of time while charging the battery pack, the

battery pack lifetime will be reduced.

aWhile pushing the rear

cover in the direction of the

arrow a, slide the cover in

the direction of arrow b.

Pick up the cover as shown

by arrow c.

bPress down the battery

pack in the direction of the

arrow a, lift the tab in the

direction of the arrow b,

and remove in the direction

of the arrow c.

Note

• For further details on how to handle the Battery Pack, refer to the Battery Pack L03 instruction manual.

To protect the environmental, be sure to bring the exhausted battery

pack to an NTT DoCoMo store, sales agent, or recycle shop.

Before Using the Handset

䂓Charging

• For details, refer to the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02(optional), FOMA Overseas/

Domestic AC Adapter 01 (optional) and FOMA DC Adapter 01 /02(optional).

• The FOMA AC Adapter 01 can be used only for AC100V. The FOMA AC Adapter 02 can be used from

AC100V to 240V.

• Even though the FOMA Overseas/Domestic AC Adapter 01 can be used from AC100V to 240V, the shape of

the AC adapter plug is for AC100V (for Japan). When you use the FOMA handset overseas, a conversion

plug adapter appropriate for the location may be required. Do not charge the handset with a transformer

designed for overseas trips.

• Insert the battery pack into the FOMA handset before charging the battery pack with the AC or DC adapter.

The battery pack cannot be charged unless it is in the handset.

• Plug/Unplug the connector slowly and securely while avoiding excess force.

• Even during a call, the charge start tone sounds from the Earpiece (if you start charging during a call).

• If you start charging the battery pack when it is empty, the handset may not be turned on for a while.

• During a long video call while charging, the inside of the FOMA handset may become hot and charging may

stop. If this happens, try charging again later.

䂓Do not charge the battery pack for a long time (several days) with the handset power turned on.

• If the FOMA handset is left with the power turned on for a long time while charging, after the charging

completes, the handset uses the power supplied from the battery pack, and the actual time to use the battery

pack becomes short and the low battery alert may sound in a short time. In this case, recharge the battery

pack properly. When recharging the battery pack, once disconnect the AC adapter or DC adapter from the

handset and reconnect it, then start recharging.

䂓Approximate battery pack usage time

The battery pack usage time may vary depending on the operating environment and the battery pack

deterioration.

• Continuous call time is approximate duration of time to be spent for talking with normal radio wave reception

level.

• Continuous standby time is approximate duration of battery time while in motion. Depending on the battery

level, set functions, operating environment such as ambient temperature, or radio wave reception level (Poor

or weak radio wave reception level), battery life can reduced to half. When i-mode communications are

performed, the call (communication)/standby time becomes shorter. Even if you do not make calls or perform

i-mode communications, the call (communication)/standby time becomes short if you compose an i-mode

mail, start a downloaded i-appli, start the i-appli Stand-by display, perform data communications or

multiaccess, use a camera, or playback videos or music.

• Depending on network conditions in your location, this may be shorter than the published values.

• Continuous standby time in a stationary state is the average usage time in a stationary state with normal radio

wave reception level while the handset is closed.

• Continuous standby time in motion is the average usage time in a state combining "standstill", "in motion"

and "out of service area" in an area with normal radio wave reception level while the handset is closed.

䂓Estimated battery pack charging time

• The estimated charging time is the duration of time to charge the battery pack with the FOMA handset turned

off and with a fully drained battery pack.

The charging time becomes longer with the FOMA handset turned on.

Network Continuous Standby Time Continuous Call Time

FOMA䋯3G Motionless: Approx. 䃂䃂䃂 hours

In motion: Approx. 䃂䃂䃂 hours Voice call: Approx. 䃂䃂䃂 minutes

Video call: Approx. 䃂䃂䃂 minutes

GSM/GPRS Approximately 䃂䃂䃂 hours Approximately 䃂䃂䃂 minutes

FOMA AC adapter 01/02 Approximately 䃂䃂䃂 minutes

FOMA DC adapter 01/02 Approximately 䃂䃂䃂 minutes

Before Using the Handset

Charging with the AC Adaptor and the Desk Adaptor

aThe AC Adapter (optional)

attaches to the Desk Adapter.

bThe AC Adapter plug connects

to the outlet.

cInsert the head of FOMA

handset into the Desk Adaptor's

stopper as shown by arrow a.

While doing that, push down the

bottom of the FOMA handset in

the direction of an arrow b.

• The charge start tone sounds and charging

begins.

• Make sure the

FOMA handset is flush against the

desktop holder.

Be careful not to nip the

connector cap or straps between the handset

and the holder.

• When charging finishes, a Charging complete

sound will be heard.

dOnce charging is complete, while holding down the desk adapter

with your fingers, firmly remove the FOMA headset from the

adapter.

• During long periods of disuse, please disconnect the AC adapter from the outlet.

䂓AC Adapter charging method

Slide the connector securely until it clicks into place. When removing the power, hold the release button while

removing the connector.

• Make sure the AC Adaptor's connector is facing the correct side. Forcibly trying to remove the adaptor could

damage the handset.

䂓DC adapter (optional)

The DC adapter attaches to a 12V/24V cigarette socket, while attached to FOMA handset.

For details, please see the FOMA DC Adaptor 01/02 instruction manual.

Before Using the Handset

Battery Meter

Checking the Battery Level

An icon indicating the approximate battery level is displayed at the top of the screen.

(Blue) : The battery is full

(Blue) : The battery is getting low

(Red) : Battery is almost completely exhausted Charge the battery.

(Red) : Battery is almost completely exhausted The handset will turn itself off in a

moment. Charge the battery.

Checking Battery Level with the Sound and Display

Battery Level can be checked through display and sounds.

[Menu]

(Settings)

"Others"

"Battery level"

The confirmation screen is displayed, a sound indicating the remaining

power is produced The display screen for the battery level disappears

in approximately 3 seconds.

"Beep Beep Beep": Battery Power is full.

"Beep Beep": Battery power is running out.

"Beep": Battery Power is almost all gone. Charge the battery.

When the battery pack is running out

A warning message sounds, saying "Low battery. Please charge". The (Red) at the top

the screen flashes. After a little while, the phone turns off automatically.

Note

• You can set whether to light the Charging Indicator during charging.→P103

• During charging, the battery level icon changes in the order of →→→ (Blue) in animation

display, and after the charging completes, (Blue) lights up.

• Use the adapter with the specified power source and voltage. Failing to do so may result in fire or

malfunction.

• The DC adapter is exclusive for a negative ground car (12V/24V).

• A fuse (2A) is a consumable item. Purchase a replacement fuse from any car parts shop.

• Do not charge while the car engine is not running to avoid exhausting the car battery.

Note

• When an icon indicating battery level is (Red) or (Red), the following actions are performed.

- Camera functions (including the barcode reader) and infrared communication functions are unavailable.

- When the Music player or the SD-Audio player is started, the warning screen indicating the low battery

level appears.

Note

• When "Key tone" is set to "Silent" or "Manner mode" is in active, you will not hear anything.

Before Using the Handset

Power On/Off

Turn On/Turn Off

Turn On

aIn a situation where power is cut, P(hold for 2

Seconds)

The FOMA Handset's dial button's backlight and touchpad light light up,

and after the wakeup screen is shown, the Stand-by display is shown.

When the "PIN1 code request" is set to "ON"

The UIM PIN entry screen opens.

After UIM PIN (P111) is entered, the Wakeup screen appears and then the Stand-by

display appears.

You can make emergency calls (to 110, 119 or 118) even when the PIN1 entry screen is

open.→P112

When the "Lock all" is set to "On"

It is required to enter the Security Code to view the contents of the folder.

When "Out of service area" appears at the top of the screen

You are out of service area or in the poor radio wave reception level. Move to a location where the icon

indicating the radio wave reception level appears. The radio wave reception level is indicated in 4 levels as

follows:

→→→

Turning the Power Off

aHold P(for 2+ seconds) when the FOMA handset is turned on.

The Exit screen opens and the power is turned off.

• To turn the handset off with the handset closed, cancel the Keypad lock and press p

(for 2+ seconds).

Note

• You will receive an "UIM not ready" message if the UIM is not inserted, or if the UIM is malfunctioning.

• A call may be disconnected even if the handset is not moved with displayed.

• Setting Time and Date →P47

• Sending Caller ID notification →P48

• Changing Terminal Security code →P111

Note

• You cannot turn off the handset with the handset closed if "Keypad lock" is set to "Slide up only".

Stand-by

Strong Weak

Before Using the Handset

Set Date&Time

Setting the Date and Time

You can set to update the time automatically. Also, the Local time zone, Daylight Saving and

Date&Time setting can be set.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Date&Time"X"Set

Date&Time"

bPerform the following operations

• If [Auto time set] is set to [On], you cannot set [Local time zone], [Daylight saving], and [Set Set

Date&Time].

[Auto time set]

Set whether to update the time on the FOMA handset based on the time information from the network.

[Local time zone ]䋪

Set the time zone for the current date and time.

For selecting from the country/city name list by pressing c[List], press M[Prev.] or I[Next] to switch

the list by page.

XSelect a time zone

[Daylight saving]䋪

Set whether to use Daylight savings time.

X"Off"/"+1 hour"/"+2 hours"

[Set date&time]䋪

You can manually set the time and date .

To set the date, use J to move the cursor to the value to change and enter the date with the dial keys

(to set the date on the calendar screen, press C[List] in the date entry field). Operations on the calendar

screen→P234

To set the time, use J to move the cursor to the value to change, enter the time with dial keys, and

switch between [AM] and [PM] with C(pressing C in the time entry field opens the time settings screen

on which you can enter a time using dial keys and J).

• Depending on the settings in [Date&Time format](P106), the display format or order of the date and time may

differ.

䋪

:GAfter selecting a field, press C to switch between "AM" and "PM".

• Depending on the set values of "Date&Time format", these items may be displayed in a different order,

or "AM/PM" may not appear.

• You can set the value between 1908/01/01 and 2099/12/31.

Default Auto time set Settings Present

Settings Present

no setting

䋺The date and time are updated automatically.

䋺Auto update will not be performed.

Note

• Time may not be updated depending on the radio wave reception level.

• When using the FOMA handset overseas, the time or time zone may not be updated depending on the

network in use. As well, the time may not be displayed properly. Use the handset after setting the time of

the place you stay by World Clock.→P240

• Time is not updated when an i-appli is running or the UIM is not inserted.

• An error of a few seconds may occur.

Time and Date

Settings Screen

Before Using the Handset

Caller ID Notification

Sending Caller ID

You can set to show/hide your Caller ID to the network in advance.

• Your Caller ID (phone number) is valuable information. Be cautious about sending your Caller ID

• Caller ID notification cannot be set when "Out of service area" is displayed.

aM[Menu]X(Service)X"Caller ID notification"

bPerform the following operation

[Activate/Deactivate caller ID notification]

Set to show/hide Caller ID.

X"Notify"/"Not notify"XEnter the network security code

[Check Caller ID notification setting]

Check the status of the setting.

Own Number

Viewing Your Own Number

You can view your own phone number (My Number) saved in the UIM.

aM[Menu]X(Own number)

䂓To view the saved detailed information

Pressing C[Detail] and entering the security code on the own number screen

open the own number detail screen.You can also save items other than the own

number.→P239

• If you have saved a phone number other than your own number, mail address,

or URL, you can make a call, create i-mode Mail, or connect to a site by moving

the cursor to the item and pressing I.

Note

• Your Caller ID is only displayed if the other party's phone is capable of displaying it.

• You can set to Caller ID notification for each dialed call.→P58

Own number

screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

Using the Phone / Video Phone

About Video Phone ........................................................................................................... 50

Making Voice/Video Calls................................................................................................. 50

Using Redial/Received Call Logs .................................................................................... 54

Using the Recent Calls ..................................................................................................... 57

Showing/Hiding Caller ID for Each Call ........................................................... 184/186 58

Sending Touch-tone Signals Quickly................................................................... Pause 58

Making International Calls........................................................................WORLD CALL 59

Set the Prefix Added to the Telephone Number...................................Prefix Settings 63

Making a Call by Specifying a Sub Address.............................................Sub Address 63

Setting the Alarm Sounding until the Reconnecting is

Performed ........................................................................................... Reconnect Alarm 64

Clarifies Conversations in Noisy Locations ......................................Noise Reduction 64

Talking in a Car with Hands-Free ..................................................... In-Car Handsfree 64

Answering a Call/Video Call

Receiving Voice/Video Call .............................................................................................. 64

Setting how to answer incoming voice calls <Answer mode> .............Answer mode 66

End/Hold Calls by Closing the FOMA Handset ...................................... Close Setting 66

Adjusting the Volume during a Call .................................................. Receiver volume 67

Adjusting the Ring Volume ........................................................ Incoming call volume 67

When You are Unable to Answer Calls/Video Calls

Placing a Call on Hold When You Cannot Answer a Call Immediately .......... On hold 67

Setting the "On Hold Tone"...................................................................... On Hold Tone 68

Setting the Holding Tone...........................................................................Holding Tone 68

Using Public mode (Drive mode)....................................... Public mode (Drive mode) 68

Public mode (Power Off) ....................................................... Public mode (Power off) 70

Checking Missed Calls ................................................................................ Missed Call 71

Recording of Voice Message from a Caller When You Cannot Answer

a Call..................................................................................................... Record message 71

Video Call Settings

Setting the Image to Send to the Other Party................................................................. 73

Changing the Video Call Settings.............................................. Video phone settings 73

Voice/Videophone Calls

About Video Phone

The Video phone function can be used with a handset that supports DoCoMo's Video phone

service.

• DoCoMo's Video phone service complies with "ISO 3GPP

䋪

1 standardized 3G-324M

䋪

2." DoCoMo's Video

phone cannot connect with handsets that support a different form of video call.

䋪1䋺3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) is local standardization organization established for the

development of common technical specifications related to 3rd Generation Mobile Communication

System (IMT-2000).

䋪2䋺3G-324M is the international standard of 3rd Generation Mobile Video Phone.

• Though Video phone may have communication speeds of 64K (64K bps) or 32K (32K bps), this FOMA handset

cannot make 32K Video call.

• This FOMA handset does not support remote monitoring.

Components of Video Call Screen

aMain window

The other party's image appears by default.

bSub window

Your image appears by default.

cCall Duration

Display in the format of Minutes: Seconds.

dSettings icons

/ Zoom Adjustment→P53

/ Handsfree ON/OFFState Display→P49

/ Picture mode ("Send camera image"/"Private mode")→P53

Making Voice/Video Calls

aEnter a phone number

• Up to 80 digits can be entered. Since the screen can display up to 32 digits, as

more than 32 digits are entered, the first entered digits will be hidden.

• Enter a number from "0" to "99" to display the phone number in the Phonebook

entry of the corresponding memory number. Also, entering a number with 3 digits

or more finds phone numbers containing the number from the Phonebook.→P89

• Start from the area code even for a local call.

•C[Save] : Add a new or extra phone number to Phonebook.→P80

•I[Mail] : Create a mail to the phone number that you entered.→P161

䂓When making a call to a fixed line phone

䂓When making a call to a mobile phone

090䋭XXXX䋭XXXX/080䋭XXXX䋭XXXX

䂓When making a call to a PHS

070䋭XXXX䋭XXXX

Phone number

entry screen

Area Code - City Code - Phone Number

Voice/Videophone Calls

A ringing tone sounds from the earpiece, and "Voice

Calling..." the dialing screen with until the other party

answers the call.

• When the Touchpad is not illuminated, touchpad keys are unavailable. Press a dial key /*/# to

illuminate the touchpad, then operate with the touchpad keys

•C[Spk on/Spk off] : Toggle Hands-free On or Off.

• Pressing a dial key/*/# during a call allows you to send Touch-tone signals.

䂓During a video call

•I[Image/Camera] : Switch the image to send between the alternate image and the camera

image.

•A: Switches between the Inner and Outer Camera for the image to send to the other party

cTo terminate the call P

To correct an entered phone number

To delete an entered digit, use LXK to move the cursor to the right of the digit and press Q.

To add a digit, use LXK to move the cursor to the position and enter the digit with the Dial Keys.

Screen Display during Dialing

The other party's name is displayed if the other party's number is saved in the phone book.

If a video call could not be made

The following messages appear if a video call could not be made (depending on the other party's mobile

phone model or subscribed network services, the displayed messages may not describe the actual situation).

Note

• If you hear the voice guidance of Caller ID Request, make a call again sending the Caller ID.

• You cannot switch to a voice/video call during a voice call using this FOMA handset.

• When the "Close setting" is set to "End the call", closing the FOMA handset during a call terminates the call.

However, when using accessories such as a flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (option), the call will

not be terminated when the handset is closed.

• To use this function, terminate those applications in the task list screen.→P231

• It is impossible to make a connection if you make a video phone call to a phone without video phone

capabilities, or if the other party is out of service area, or his phone is off. If the other party's phone doesn't

support video phone, and you have set Auto redial as voice to "On", before making a video call connection

it will cut out and automatically redial the number as a voice call. However, if the other party is using an ISDN

64k or a PIAFS connection and their video phone does not support the 3G-324M standard (As of 䃂 2007),

or when calling a wrong number, it may not behave in this fashion. Communication charges may apply.

• If you make a video phone call to an emergency number such as "110", "119" or "118", it will make a voice

call automatically.

• i-mode mail or Message R/F arriving during a video call is stored at the i-mode Center. SMS can be received

even during a video call.

• There is a digital charge for sending the Substitute Image.

• During a call, the low battery alert sounds from the Earpiece every 30 seconds. You can keep talking;

however, the call will be terminated momentarily when the handset power is automatically turned off.

Message Description

Check number,

then redial.

The phone number is not valid.

Number Busy The other party is on a call (this message may appear when the other party is in

packet communication depending on the handset).

Video call screenVoice call screen

When making voice call

When making video call

Continue on the next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Sub Menu on the Phone Number Entry Screen

aPhone number entry screen (P50) XM[Menu]XPerform the

following operations

[Video phone call]

Make a Video Phone.

[Caller ID]

Sets whether the other party receives your Caller ID information when you make a phone call.→P58

X"Not notify"/"Notify"/"Cancel"

[International dial]

After selecting the country code to make a call, "009130010" (WORLD CALL) and the country code will

be inserted at the beginning of the phone number.→P59

[Select prefix]

Adds the prefix number at the beginning of the entered phone number. You can do that only one time.

→P60

[Multi number]

If you subscribe to Multi number, select a number to use for Caller ID when making calls.→P262

X"Basic Number"/"Additional number1"/ "Additional number2"/"Cancel"

[Compose mail]

Creates a new i-mode mail to the entered phone number.→P161

[Add to phonebook]

Adds an entry to the phonebook→P80

[Search phonebook ]

Search the phonebook with the number already entered→P83

Voice Call Screen Sub Menu

aIn-call display (P49) XM[Menu] XPerform the following

operations

[Add new]

䋪

Making a Call Putting Current Call on Hold and immediately dial another party.

[End active call ]

Disconnect the call.

Number in packet

communication

The other party is in packet communication.

Out of Service Area/

Power Off.

The other party's handset is either out of the service area or turned off.

Activate Caller ID The Caller ID was not sent (when the call is made to V-live or Visualnet)).

Call forwarded.

Please wait

The call is being forwarded.

Redial as a voice call The Call forwarding service is activated, and the forwarding destination is a

non-video phone.

Limit exceeded. Call

cannot be connected

Your usage fee limit plan (Type limit or Family wide limit) has been exceeded.

Connect from i-mode The video call was not dialed from the official i-mode site information provider

(when the call is made to V-live).

Video Call Failed Activate the "Caller ID notification" and redial.

• This message may appear for other reasons, as well.

Message Description

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Hold/Cancel held call]

䋪

Put a call on hold, or cancel the hold on the call.

[Mute/Unmute]

Enable or disable to mute your voice on the other party's handset.

[Send My Info.]

Creates an i-mode mail in which the phone number(Own number) is entered in the body. →P161

[Search phonebook]

䋪

Search for a Phonebook entry.→P83

䋪1䋺 Not available if you do not subscribe to the Call Waiting service.

䋪2䋺 Not available if you make a call using Redial or Received calls or Phonebook is activated. To use

this function, terminate those applications in the task list screen.

Sub Menu During a Video Call

aVideo call screen (P49) XM[Menu] XPerform the following

operations

[End call]

Disconnect the call.

[Hold]

Place the call on hold the active call. To cancel, press C.

[Substitute image/Camera image]

Switch the image to send between the alternate image and the camera image.

[Camera settings]

Configure the camera for video calls. Press J to select an icon. After setting, press M[Close].

[Video phone set]

You can set the display and lighting for video calls. After setting, press I[Done].

[Screen size]

Sets the display size of the main window.

X"Normal"/"Large"

[Visual preference]

Configures the preferences for the images sent to the other party

[Switch camera]

Switches the camera to send the image to the other party between the Inner camera and the Outer

camera.

[Search phonebook]

䋪

Search for a Phonebook entry.→P83

Zoom

Brightness

Night mode

: Zooms the camera image (x1 / x2).

: Adjusts the brightness of the camera screen (High /Standard /Low).

: Set this when using in dark places (et cetera..).

Display setting

Other-Me

Other only

Me only:

: Other-Me: Display the other party's image on the main window and your image on the sub

window.

: Other-Me: Display your image on the main window and the other party's image on the sub

window.

: Other only: Display only the other party's image.

: Me only: Display only your image.

Backlight

"Always 'ON'" : Always lights during a call.

"Alert setting" : In accord with "Light" in (Settings)→P103

Prefer img qual

Standard

Prefer motion spd

: Set priority to sent image quality. Effective when there is little movement.

: Set the sent video quality and motion to standard.

: Set priority to motion for sent images. Effective when there is a lot of movement.

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Own number]

Displays your phone number(Own number).

䋪䋺 Not available if you make a call using Redial or Received calls or Phonebook is activated. To use

this function, terminate those applications in the task list screen.

Using Redial/Received Call Logs

Redial and the Received call logs can be used to make phone calls. Also, the Recent calls (sent

and received) can be used to make calls.

Redial

Calling the Same Party Again

Redial maintains a list of the last 30 calls and video phone calls made. The phone number and

the calling date/time are stored in the call logs.

• If there have been more than 30 calls made, the most recent 60 calls are retained.

aThe Stand-by display XR

• The call logs also saves the names of people called if they are in the

phone book. The call logs saves the phone number and category of

people who called if they are not in the phone book.

aThe other party's name as saved in the Phonebook

If the name is not saved, the phone number will be displayed.

bOutgoing phone call type

䇭Dialing a voice call

䇭Dialing a video call

cThe Other Party's Phone Number

dDialing an International Call

䃨䇭 Calling overseas from Japan

䃨䇭 Calling from overseas

䃨䇭 Dialing an international call using international roaming overseas

eDialed from Multi Number

䋪

䋯䋯 Basic number/Additional number 1/Additional number 2

䋪

: Appears if you subscribe to the Multi number service.

fSent Date and Time

bMove cursor to the Number to RedialXC

aOutgoing phone call type

bThe name entered into the phone book

If not entered into the phone book, "Unregistered" is displayed.

cThe Other Party's Phone Number

dDialed from Multi Number

The name registered for the line in "Number settings" in P262 appears

with an outgoing Multi number call.

䋪

: Appears if you subscribe to the Multi number service.

eSent Date and Time

fCall Duration

Redial List Screen

Redial Details

Screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

gInternational Call Duration

䃨䇭 Calling overseas from Japan

䃨䇭 Calling from overseas

䃨䇭 When making voice call

M[Menu] and then selectX"Video phone call"

Redial List Screen / Redial Details Screen Sub Menu

aThe Redial List Screen(P54)/ Redial Details Screen(P54)XM

[Menu]XPerforms the following operations

[Video phone call]

Make a Video Phone.

[Compose mail]

Creates an i-mode mail to the phone number on the Redial screen.→P161

[Add to phonebook]

Adds a number to the phonebook from the redial list.→P80

[Customize call]

Make a call changing the phone number in the ridial. You can save the phone number to the phonebook

by using C [Save].

XLon the Phone number entry screen XKto move the cursor to the place where you want change the

number Xchange the phone number XA

[Change list]䋪

Switch logs to display.

[Delete 1 item]

Delete the selected/displayed Redial entry.

XC[Yes]

[Delete all]

䋪

Deletes all redial entries.

XC[Yes]

䋪䋺 Not displayed on the Detail screen.

Note

• You can also make a call by selecting an entry on the Dialed Calls list screen and pressing A. You can

also make a video call if you select M[Menu] X"Dialed video call".

• If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the Phonebook, the name found first in a Reading search

is displayed.

• Phone numbers dialed with "184" or "186" will be recorded as a different phone number.

• Press I[Mail] on the Redial List Screen / Redial Details Screen, to create an i-mode mail to the phone

number on the selected redial entry.

Recent calls

Recent mail

Received Calls

Received mail

Sent mail

: Display the recent call list screen.→P57

: Display the recent mail list screen.→P178

: Display the Received call log list screen.→P56

: Display the received mail log list screen.→P178

: Display the sent mail log list screen.→P178

When making voice call

When making video call

Continue on the next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

Received Calls

Using the Received Calls Log

Up to 30 incoming voice or video call entries are recorded in Received Calls. The phone

number and the date/time are stored in the call logs.

• If there have been more than 30 calls made, the most recent 30 calls are retained in the log.

aThe Stand-by display XL

• If the caller sends Caller ID, the type of call and a name saved in the

Phonebook are displayed. If the caller is not saved in the Phonebook, the

call type and the phone number are displayed. If the caller did not send

the Caller ID, the reason for No Caller ID is displayed.

aThe other party's name as saved in the Phonebook

If the name is not saved, the phone number will be displayed.

bIncoming Method

䋯 Arrived /Miss voice call(includes "Reject call")

䋯 Arrived /Miss video call(includes "Reject call")

cThe Other Party's Phone Number

If the phone number has not been saved in the phone book, "Not recorded" is displayed.

If there are arrows right and left of the icon, press J to view the content.

dIncoming international call

䃨䇭 Incoming international call from overseas

䃨䇭 Calling from overseas

䃨䇭 Dialing an international call using international roaming overseas

eIncoming Multi number call

䋪

䋯䋯 Basic number/Additional number 1/Additional number 2

䋪

: Appears if you subscribe to the Multi number service.

fReceived Date and Time

bMove cursor to a log XC

aIncoming Method

bThe name entered into the phone book

If the phone number is not in the phone book, "Unregistered" is

displayed, and if the information of the phone number has not been

received, "User unset" is displayed.

cThe Other Party's Phone Number

dIncoming Multi number call䋪

The name registered for the line in "Number settings" in P262 appears

with an incoming Multi number call.

䋪 : This is displayed when you subscribe to Multi number.

eReceived Date and Time

fCall Duration

䋯䇭

Arrived /Miss voice call

gInternational Call Duration

䃨䇭 ᶏᄖ䈎䉌 ࿖㓙㔚⹤䈪⌕ା

䃨䇭 ᶏᄖ䈪࿖㓙䊨䊷䊚䊮䉫 ਛ䈮⌕ା

䃨䇭 ᶏᄖ䈪࿖㓙䊨䊷䊚䊮䉫 ਛ䈮࿖㓙㔚⹤䈪⊒ା

M[Menu] and then select X"Video phone call"

Received Calls List

Received Calls

Details Screen

When making voice call

When making video call

Voice/Videophone Calls

Sub Menu of the Received Calls List/Details Screen

aThe Received Calls List Screen(P56)/ Received Calls Details

Screen(P56)XM[Menu]XPerforms the following operations

[Video phone call]

Make a Video Phone.

[Compose mail]

Creates an i-mode mail to the phone number on the Received calls screen.→P161

[Add to phonebook]

Adds a number to the phonebook from the Received call logs .→P80

[Customize call]

Pick up a phone number from the Received calls list screen, edit the phone number, then make a call.

Use C[Save] to register the phone number to the Phonebook.

XL on the Phone number entry screen XK to move the cursor to the place where you want change

the number X change the phone number XA

[Change list]

Switch logs to display.

[Delete 1 item]

Delete the selected/displayed Redial entry.

XC[Yes]

[Delete all]

Delete all entries from the Received calls.

XC[Yes]

䋪䋺 Not displayed on the Detail screen.

Recent calls

Using the Recent Calls

Up to 60 incoming and outgoing calls can be recorded in "Recent call logs".

• When more than 60 items have been added, items are deleted sequentially from the oldest ones.

aThe Stand-by displayuA

For subsequent steps and the description of screen components, see the

"Redial"(P54), "Received calls"(P56) section.

Note

• You can also make a call by selecting alog on the Received Calls list screen and pressing A. You can

also make a video call if you select M[Menu]XDialed video call".

• The reason for the lack of a Caller ID is displayed in the history for a call without Caller ID.→P119

• If the same phone number is saved repeatedly in the Phonebook, the name found first in a Reading search

is displayed.

• Received calls from parties using dial-in service may have a different number from the number they actually

dialed from.

• Press I[Mail] on the Received Calls List/Details Screen, to create an i-mode mail to the phone number

on the selected received entry.

Recent calls

Recent mail

Received mail

Redial

Sent mail

: Display the recent call list screen.→P57

: Display the recent mail list screen.→P178

: Display the received mail log list screen.→P178

: Display the redial list screen.→P54

: Display the sent mail log list screen.→P178

Voice/Videophone Calls

184/186

Showing/Hiding Caller ID for Each Call

There are 2 ways to show/hide Caller ID for each call: adding "184"/"186", or using the sub

menu on the Phone number entry screen.

Showing/Hiding Caller ID by Adding 184/186

aEnter "184"(Not notify)/"186"(Notify) XEnter the phone number

M[Menu] and then select X"Video phone call"

Showing/Hiding Caller ID Using the Sub Menu

Example: Using the Sub menu of the Phone number entry screen

Enter the phone number

[Menu]

"CallerID"

X"Notify"/

"Not notify"/"Cancel"

M[Menu] and then select X"Video phone call"

Pause

Sending Touch-tone Signals Quickly

Enter "P" and a number after the phone number and make a voice call to the number. It will

send a Push signal (DTMF) to the number after "P".

• The signal may not be received depending on the device on the receiving side.

aEnter the phone number

Press *3timesandenter"P"

Enter

the number to send

After the call is connected, the number after "P" is displayed. The displayed number is send

by pressing A.

Note

• The sub menu of the Recent call list screen/detail screen is the same as the one of the Redial and Received

call list screen/detail screen.→P55, P57

Note

• You can set to show/hide Caller ID to the network in advance.→P260

When making voice call

When making video call

When making voice call

When making video call

Voice/Videophone Calls

WORLD CALL

Making International Calls

WORLD CALL is an international calling service available on DoCoMo mobile phones.

FOMA service subscribers are also signed up for WORLD CALL at the time of initial

subscription (except subscribers explicitly declining this service).

• This service works with approximately 240 countries and regions around the world.

• Charges for "WORLD CALL" are added to the monthly FOMA service call charges.

• No initial fee and no fixed monthly charges apply.

• This service is not available with some billing plans.

• For details on WORLD CALL, contact the "DoCoMo Information Center" shown at the back of this manual.

• When using international carriers other than DoCoMo, please contact the carrier directly.

Change to the International Call Dialing Procedure

The "MY LINE" service is not applicable to mobile phone communications, including WORLD

CALL service. Along with the introduction of the "MY LINE" service, the dialing procedure for

international communications using a mobile phone has been changed. Consequently, the

previous dialing procedure (Omitting "010" from the following dialing procedure) can no longer

be used.

Enter the Phone Number And Make a International Call

Enter the number in the following order.

a"009130-010-Country code- Area Code (City Code) - Phone

Number"

• Generally, in the situation where a "0" appears before the Area Code (City Code), please remove "0".

(In a few countries, like Italy, "0" must not be removed).

䂓When making International video call

M[Menu] and then select X "Video phone call"

If an overseas party uses a specific 3G mobile phone, you can make an International video call to that party

by pressing M[Menu] X Select "Video phone call" after the following dialing procedures.

• For information about the countries where connection can be made and telecommunications carriers, visit

the DoCoMo's web site.

• The other party's image displayed on the FOMA handset may blur and may be unable to be connected

depending on the handset connecting the international video-phone.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Making an International Call Using "+"

Enter "+" at the beginning of a phone number and dial to replace "+" with an international

access code automatically. Press 0for more than one second to enter "+".

• The WORLD CALL (009130010) is set to be added automatically by default.→P61

a0(for 1+ seconds) XEnter "Country Code - Area Code (City

Code) - Phone Number"

• Generally, in the situation where a "0" appears before the Area Code (City Code), please remove "0".

(In a few countries, like Italy, "0" must not be removed).

International call

: Make a call after converting "+" into an international access code.

Original number

: Make a call without converting "+"into an international access code.

Cancel 䋺Cancel dialing.

䂓When making International video call

M[Menu] and then select X "Video phone call"

cSelect a dialing method

Making an International Call Adding International Access

Code

You can select an international access code from the sub menu and add it to the phone

number.

aEnter "Area code - other party's phone number"

• Generally, in the situation where a "0" appears before the Area Code (City Code), please remove "0".

(In a few countries, like Italy, "0" must not be removed).

bM[Menu]X"Select prefix"XSelect an international access code

The selected international access code is inserted at the beginning of the entered phone

number.

䂓When making International video call

M[Menu] and then select X "Video phone call"

Making an International Call Easily

The International Call settings can be changed.

Note

• This option is available only inside the FOMA network service area.

• If the phone number has "+81" as its prefix, "+" will not be converted into the International Access Code.

Note

• By default, WORLD CALL(009130010) is registered to "Prefix 1".→P63

Dialed call

confirmation

screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

Setting to Add the International Access Code Automatically<Auto assist

setting>

You can set whether to add an international access code automatically instead of "+" when

you make a call by entering "+" at the beginning of the phone number.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"International dial"X"Auto assist

setting"X"Auto"/"OFF "

Auto 䋺 When set, it automatically sets the international access code prefix.

None䋺 Doesn't change the number.

Setting International Access Codes<International Prefix Settings>

When setting "Auto assist setting" to "Auto", specify the international access code to add

automatically.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"International dial "X"IDD prefix

setting"

bPerform the following operation

[IDD prefix name]

Enters the International Dial number of the country from the Auto Assist Settings

[IDD prefix code]

Enters the International Dial number of the country from the Auto Assist Settings

cI[Done]

Setting Auto Assist of Country Code<Auto internastional dial>

Set whether to automatically replace leading "0", if entered, of a phone number with "+ Country

code" during international roaming. Also, you can specify Country code to be added

automatically.

aM[Menu] X(Setting) X"International dial" X"Auto

international dial" XPerform the following operations

[Auto international dial]

X"On" / "Off"

[Target country]

XSelect a Country code

bI[Done]

Default Auto

Default IDD prefix name: WORLDCALL IDD prefix code: 009130010

Default Auto international dial: On Target country: Japan 81

Voice/Videophone Calls

Registering Country Code<Country code list>

Up to 50 Country codes can be registered.

aM[Menu] X(Setting) X"International dial" X

"Country code list"

bI[Menu] XPerform the following operations

•C : Edit the selected county code.

[Country name]

XEnter name

[MCC]

Up to 5 digits can be stored.

XSelect a Country code

cI[Done]

Sub menu of the "Country code list" screen

a"Country code list" screen (P62) XM[Menu] XPerform the

following operations

[Add new]

Go to Step 2 (P62) in "Registering Country Code".

[Edit]

Edit the selected country code. Go to Step 2 (P62) in "Registering Country Code".

[[Delete]

Delete the selected country code.

X"Yes"

[Delete all]

Delete all country codes.

X"Yes"

Default 22 country codes have been stored

Note

<Edit>

• You can edit a default country code.

• You cannot delete the country code that is set to be added automatically in "Auto international dial" (P61).

"Country code

list" screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

Prefix Settings

Set the Prefix Added to the Telephone Number

Up to 3 numbers number (prefix) to add to the beginning of the phone number such as an

international access code, "184", "186 can be stored .

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing "X"Prefix dial"

bSelect Prefix Input Column XEnter the NumberXI[Done]

• Up to ten digits can be entered as a prefix.

Sub Address

Making a Call by Specifying a Sub Address

Allows user to set if digits after ":" in a phone number with a ":" are identified as a sub-

address. A sub-address is used to call up a specific device connected to an ISDN line or to

select contents on "V live".

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing "X"Sub-address

setting"X"On"/"Off"

On 䋺Separates sub addresses by ":".

Off 䋺Doesn't separate Sub addresses by ":".

Default Prefix 1: 009130010 Prefix 2/Prefix 3: Unregistered

Note

• Please do not add Pauses and the such to the prefix. If they are present, the call can not be connected.

Default On

Note

•":" is not identified as a delimiter of a sub-address if:

:" is entered at the beginning of the phone number.

- A specific number such as "184" or "186" is entered at the beginning of the phone number and ":" is

entered right after it.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Reconnect Alarm

Setting the Alarm Sounding until the

Reconnecting is Performed

You can set an alarm that keeps sounding until a voice or video call is reconnected when the

call was disconnected due to weak signals.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing "X"Call feature"

X"Reconnection alarm"XSelect Alarm

High alarm䋺Sets to High alarm.

Low alarm 䋺Sets to Low alarm.

No Alarm 䋺Sets not to sound an alarm.

Noise Reduction

Clarifies Conversations in Noisy Locations

Noise Reduction reduces background noise. The other party can more easily understand the

conversation, even in a noisy locale.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing "X"Call feature"X

"Noise reduction"X"On"/"Off"

On 䋺Noise Reduction is engaged.

Off 䋺Noise Reduction is disengaged.

Receiving Voice/Video Call

aIncoming Call Arrives

The ringtone sounds.

•P䋺Place the call on response hold.→P67

䂓During a voice call

•I[Silent] : Stop the ring tone or vibration.

Again, if I[Reject] is pressed, the call is rejected.

䂓During a video call

•C[Substitute image] : Answer the call using the

substitute image.

Default High alarm

Note

• Reconnection depends on the situation and signal strength.

• If the signal suddenly worsens, the call may be dropped without the alarm sounding.

• The billed airtime will continue during the reconnection attempt.

• If the call is dropped, the other party will hear nothing.

Default Off

Incoming voice

call screen Incoming video

call screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

Answer the call.

• When the Touchpad is not illuminated, touchpad keys are unavailable. Press a dial key /*/# to

illuminate the touchpad, then operate with the touchpad keys

•C[Spk on/Spk off] : Toggle Hands-free On or Off.

• Pressing a dial key/*/# during a call allows you to send Touch-tone signals.

䂓During a voice call

•I[Hold/Release] : If you subscribe to the Call waiting service, you can hold the call or cancel the

hold.

䂓During a video call

•I[Image/Camera] : Switch the image to send between the alternate image and the camera

image.

•A: Switches between the Inner and Outer Camera for the image to send to the other party

cWhen talking is over, P

When the caller has sent Caller ID

• If you subscribe to Multi number, the name registered for the line in "Number settings" in P262 appears with

an incoming call.

When the caller has sent Caller ID

The reason for no Caller ID is displayed instead of a phone number.→P119

Note

• The incoming call actions such as a ring tone or vibration vary depending on the settings in "Profile" or the

settings saved in the Phonebook.→P77, P92, P95

• When "General manner" is activated, the ring tone does not sound. But if "Original manner mode" is set, the

ring tone may sound depending on the settings.→P98

•When "Answer mode " is set to "Slide up", you can answer a call by opening the handset.→P66

• When the "Close setting" is set to "End the call", closing the FOMA handset during a call terminates the call.

However, when using accessories such as the flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (option) the call

will not be terminated when the handset is closed.

• If subscribed to the Voice mail, Call waiting or Call forwarding service, when "Arrival call act" is set to

"Answer" and "Set in-call arrival act." is set to "Activate", a tone during a call sounds if a call arrives during

another call. If tone sounds during a call , the network services are available.→P261

• When the Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, incoming call is not informed (The ring tone does not

sound). Also, even if a call arrives when the display is turned off, the backlight of the display will not be

turned on.

• When the caller is registered in the Phonebook, the phone number and registered name appear.

• You can set "Set mute ring (sec.)" to delay the incoming call actions for a call made from the other party not

saved in the or without Caller ID.→P121

• Use the following functions to reject incoming calls from a caller not saved in Phonebook/specific caller.

- In "Accept/Reject call ", activate "Reject unknown "→P121

- In "Accept/Reject call ", activate "Reject on list"→P118

• You cannot switch to a video call during a voice call using this FOMA handset.

• During a call, the low battery alert sounds from the Earpiece every 30 seconds. You can keep

talking;however, the call will be terminated momentarily when the handset power is automatically turned off.

• This FOMA handset does not support handsfree devices (such as In-car handsfree kit 01) via USB

connection.

• When the Voice mail service is activated during a video call, a SMS notifies you of a new message.

• Even if the Call forwarding service is activated, an incoming video call is not forwarded if the forwarding

destination is not a video-phone device supporting 3G-324M. Check the forwarding destination device

before setting the Call Forwarding.

• i-mode mail or Message R/F arriving during a video call is stored at the i-mode Center. SMS can be received

even during a video call.

• You cannot receive 32K video calls and they are not recorded in Received Calls.

• You cannot switch between a voice and video call during a call using the FOMA handset.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Incoming Call Screen Sub Menu

aIncoming call screen (P64) XM[Menu]XPerform the following

operations

[Voice mail]䋪1

Connect a call to the Voice mail service center.

[Call rejection]䋪2

Reject an incoming call and hang up.

[Call forwarding]

Transfer an incoming call to the specified number.

䋪1䋺This option is not available unless you subscribe to the Voice mail service.

䋪2䋺This option is not available unless you subscribe to the Call forwarding service and you specify a

forwarding destination.

Answer mode

Setting how to answer incoming voice calls

You can set to answer an incoming voice call by opening the FOMA handset (Slide up) or

pressing a dial key in addition to A.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing"X"Incoming call "

X"Answer mode"

bPerform the following operation

[Slide up]

You can answer a call by opening the FOMA handset.

[Any key answer]

You can answer a call by pressing dial keys, *,# other than A.

[SEND key only]

You can answer a call by pressing A.

Close Setting

End/Hold Calls by Closing the FOMA Handset

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing"X"Call feature"X

"Close settings"XSelect conditions of closing the FOMA handset

End Call䋺Ends the call.

Continue䋺Continues the call.

On Hold 䋺Place the call on hold the active call.

Default SEND key only

Default End Call

Voice/Videophone Calls

Receiver volume

Adjusting the Volume during a Call

The Receiver volume can be adjusted in 7 levels from 1䌾7.

aIncoming Call Screen (P49) XF䋯E

•F䋺 Increase the volume.

•E䋺 Decreases the volume.

Incoming call volume

Adjusting the Ring Volume

The ring volume can be adjusted in 8 levels from 0 to 7.

aThe Stand-by display XF䋯E

The sound volume adjustment screen opens, and each press of F䋯E changes the volume.

• If no action is taken for approximately 2 seconds, the sound volume adjustment screen closes

automatically and the volume is set.

On hold

Placing a Call on Hold When You Cannot

Answer a Call Immediately

aIncoming Call Screen (P64) XP

The tone set in the "On hold tone"(P68) is played.

The image set in the "Response hold image"(P73)

appears for video calls.

bwhen you can resume the callA

• You can also cancel the hold on a video call by pressing c [Answer]. If you press A to cancel the

hold, the alternate image will be sent to the other party.

䂓To terminate a voice call/video call

Press P.

Default 3

Note

• The adjusted Earpiece volume will be retained after the call.

• "Receiver volume" in "Volume" (P94) is changed, too.

Default 3

Note

• Not available when Manner Mode is activated.

• "Incoming call volume" in "Volume" (P94) is changed, too.

Voice Call on

Hold screen Video Call

ResponseHold

screen

Continue on the next page

Voice/Videophone Calls

On Hold Tone

Setting the "On Hold Tone"

Instead of answering the ring, you can select to play one of the 3 on-hold-tones (guidance) to

the calling party.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing"X"Incoming call "X

"On hold tone"X"Hold tone 1"/"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"

•I[Play] : plays back the hold tone.

Holding Tone

Setting the Holding Tone

The Holding tone which the other party hear can be selected from 3 tones.

[Menu]

(Settings)

"Call/VT/Dialing "

"Call feature"

"Holding tone"

Hold tone 1"/"Hold tone 2"/"Hold tone 3"

•I[Play] : plays back the hold tone.

Public mode (Drive mode)

Using Public mode (Drive mode)

Public mode (Drive mode) is an automatic response service to assist in observing manners in

public locations. When Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, a voice guidance is played to

the other party indicating that you are driving or at a place where you cannot talk (such as on a

train, bus, or in a movie theater) and cannot answer the call, and the call is disconnected.

• You can set or cancel Public mode (Drive mode) in Standby (and when "out of service area" is displayed).

• This option is not available during data communication.

a*(One second later)

When a call arrives, a voice guidance is played in Japanese saying that "The person you

are calling is currently driving or in the area where cellphone should not be used. Please try

again later" is played.

Note

• The other party is charged even during a hold.

• If you subscribe to the Voice mail service/Call forwarding service, you can connect the incoming call to the

Voicemail service center/forward the incoming call to the specified phone number.→P256, P259

Default Hold Tone 1

Voice/Videophone Calls

When Public mode (Drive mode) is set

Even when a call arrives to your handset, the ring tone does not sound. appears on the Stand-by display

and Received call log is recorded.

A voice guidance indicating that you are driving or you are at a location where you cannot use the handset is

played to the caller, and the call is disconnected.

To cancel Public mode (Drive mode)

Press * (for more than 1 second) at the Stand-by display.

Incoming Call Actions in a Network Service and Public mode (Drive

mode)

Actions performed when Public mode and a Network Service are set concurrently.

䋪䋺 If the Network Service ringing duration is set to 0(zero) seconds, the Public Mode voice (Drive mode)

guidance is not played, and the call is not recorded in Received Calls.

Note

• appears at the top of the screen when Public mode is activated.

• Even when Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, you can make calls as usual.

• If a call with "Private ID" arrives when Caller ID request is set, the voice guidance of Caller ID Request is

played (instead of Public mode (Drive mode) voice guidance).

• If Manner Mode is activated concurrently, Public mode settings take precedence.

• Tones other than from operations (ring tones or alarms, etc.) do not sound when Public mode (Drive mode)

is set.

• Even if mail arrives when the Public mode (Drive mode) is activated, incoming call actions such as sounding

the ring tone, blinking the Illumination Indicator, or vibrating the FOMA handset will not take place.

Service name Incoming Actions for a Voice Call Incoming Actions for a Video Call

Voice mail service After the Public mode (Drive mode)

voice guidance is played, the call is

connected to the Voice mail service

center.䋪

The Public mode (Drive mode) image

prompt does not appear, and the call is

connected to the Voice mail service

center.

Call waiting The Public mode (Drive mode) voice

guidance is played and the call is

disconnected.

After the Public mode (Drive mode) image

prompt is shown, the call is disconnected.

Call Forwarding Service After the Public Mode (Drive mode)

voice guidance is played, the call is

forwarded to the forwarding

destination.䋪

Whether the Public mode voice

guidance is played is according to the

settings of Call forwarding service

voice guidance option.

The Public mode (Drive mode) image

prompt does not appear, and the call is

forwarded to the forwarding destination.

If the forwarding destination cannot

handle video calls, the call is

disconnected.

Nuisance Call Blocking

service If the caller is saved to reject a

nuisance call, the reject call message

is played and the call is disconnected.

In a case other than the above, the

Public mode (Drive mode) voice

guidance is played and the call is

disconnected.

If the caller is saved to reject a nuisance

call, the reject call image prompt is

displayed and the call is disconnected.

In a case other than the above, the Public

mode (Drive mode) image prompt is

shown and the call is disconnected.

Caller ID Request If the caller does not send the Caller

ID, the voice guidance of Caller ID

Request is played and the call is

disconnected.

If the caller sends the Caller ID, the

Public mode (Drive mode) voice

guidance is played and the call is

disconnected.

If the caller does not send the Caller ID,

the image prompt of Caller ID Request is

displayed and the call is disconnected.

If the caller sends the Caller ID, the Public

mode (Drive mode) image prompt is

shown and the call is disconnected.

Voice/Videophone Calls

Public mode (Power off)

Public mode (Power Off)

Public mode (Power Off) is a response service to help maintain decorum in public locations.

When Public mode (Power Off) is set, when a call arrives while the power is turned off, a voice

guidance is played to the other party indicating that you are at a place where the handset must

be turned off (such as in hospitals, in aircraft, or near priority seats on a train) and cannot

answer the call, and the call is disconnected.

a":25251" is enteredXA

Public mode (Power Off) is activated (the Stand-by display opens the same).

After Public mode (Power Off) is set, when a call arrives while the power is turned off, "The

person you are calling is currently in the area where use is prohibited and cannot pick up

the phone. Please try again later.". " is played.

After activating Public mode (Power Off)

Public mode (Power Off) is activated until it is cancelled by dialing ":25250". Turning the power on does not

deactivate the mode.

The Public mode (Power Off) voice guidance is played even when you are out of service area or in the poor

radio wave reception level. A voice guidance indicating that you are at a location where you must turn the

handset off is played to the other party, and the call is disconnected.

To cancel Public mode (Power Off)

Enter ":25250" and press A.

To check the status of Public mode (Power Off)

Enter ":25259" and press A.

Incoming Call Actions in a Network Service and Public mode (Power Off)

Actions performed when Public mode and a Network Service are set concurrently.

䋪䋺 If the ringing duration for the Network Service is set to 0 (zero) seconds, the Public mode (Power Off) voice

guidance is not played.

Service name Incoming Actions for a Voice Call Incoming Actions for a Video Call

Voice mail service After the Public mode (Power Off) voice

guidance is played, the call is

connected to the Voice mail service

center.䋪

The Public mode (Power Off) image

prompt is not displayed, and the call is

connected to the Voice mail service

center.

Call Forwarding Service After the Public mode (Power Off)

voice

guidance is played, the call is connected

to the forwarding destination.

䋪

Whether the Public mode (Power off)

voice guidance is played is in accord

with the settings of Call forwarding

service voice guidance option.

The Public mode (Power Off) image

prompt does not appear, and the call is

forwarded to the forwarding destination.

If the forwarding destination cannot

handle video calls, the call is

disconnected.

Nuisance Call Blocking

service If the caller is saved to reject a nuisance

call, the reject call message is played

and the call is disconnected.

In a case other than the above, the

Public mode (Power Off) voice

guidance is played and the call is

disconnected.

If the caller is saved to reject a nuisance

call, the reject call image prompt is

displayed and the call is disconnected.

In a case other than the above, the

Public mode (Power Off) image prompt

is shown and the call is disconnected.

Caller ID Request If the caller does not send the Caller ID,

the voice guidance of Caller ID Request

is played and the call is disconnected.

If the caller sends the Caller ID, the

Public mode (Power Off) voice guidance

is played and the call is

disconnected

If the caller does not send the Caller ID,

the image prompt of Caller ID Request

is displayed and the call is

disconnected.

If the caller sends the Caller ID, the

Public mode (Power Off) image prompt is

shown and the call is

disconnected

Voice/Videophone Calls

Missed Call

Checking Missed Calls

If you could not answer a call, the Missed call notification screen opens on the Stand-by

display. The Received Calls List Screen can be accessed from its icons, allowing the user to

confirm who has called.

aAn incoming call terminates

The missed call icon is shown on the Stand-by display. The

number on the icon indicates the number of calls.

bCXKto select an missed call icon

The Received Calls list screens (P56) displayed.

Record message

Recording of Voice Message from a Caller

When You Cannot Answer a Call

When record message is activated, if you cannot answer the call, the voice guidance is played

and the other party’s message is recorded.

Setting the Record Message

aM[Menu] X(LifeKit)X"Record message"X"Record msg.

setting"

bPerform the following operation

•C [List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Activate record msg.]

Set the Record Message. When selecting "Off", you cannot set the following items:

X"On/"Off"

[To answer]

When a phone call is received, set a time between 0 and 120 seconds for the Record Message to

auto-answer the call.

XEnter Response Time

[Answer message]

Select an answer message.

X"Japanese1"/"Japanese2"/"English"

•I You can listen to the response message.

cI[Done]

Note

• After he Received Calls list screen is displayed, the missed call icon will vanish.

Default Activate record msg.: Off

Stand-by display

Missed

call icon

(The number indicates

the number of calls)

Voice/Videophone Calls

When a Call Arrives with Record Message Activated

In a Voice Call, the other party's voice is recorded.

䂓To answer the caller while you are playing or recording messages

Press A.

䂓To play Record Message

The Stand-by displayXPress C[OK]XJ and then select or press E for 1+ seconds. The Record

Message list screen (P72)is displayed.

• disappears after the Record Message is.

Playing/Deleting Record Message

aM[Menu]X(Lifekit)X"Record message"X

"Record Msg. list"

•I[Delete] : The selected Record Message is deleted.

䂓To delete all Recorded Messages

M[Menu] on the Record Message list screen XSelect "Delete all".

bMove the cursor to a Record MessageXC[Play]

The Record message is played.

•C䋺Stop the message.

•Q䋺Return to the Record Message list screen.

Note

• (Blue) appears at the top of the screen when the Record Message is activated.

• If the set Response time is longer than the set ringing time for Voice mail service/Call forwarding service,

the settings of the ringing time for the Voicemail service/Call Forwarding service take precedence.

• If the response time is set shorter than the set "Set mute ring (sec.)", Record message starts without the

ringing action.

Note

• The Record Message cannot be recorded when "Out of service area" is displayed, the handset power is

turned off, or Public mode (Drive mode) is set.

• If a call arrives when the Additional guidance is being played or when a Record message is being recorded,

the call is rejected.

䂓䈍㗿䈇

It is recommended that you write down messages from the Record Message and store them in a separate

location. DoCoMo is not responsible for lost data due to failure or repair of the FOMA handset.

During an

incoming call PlayingAdditional

Guidance

Recording a

Record Message

Displaying an

icon

The set time

has elapsed

Recorded

Displaying

an new

Record

message icon

(The number

indicatesthenumber

of calls)

RecordMessage

List Screen

Voice/Videophone Calls

Setting the Image to Send to the Other Party

Substitute image

Setting the Substitute Image

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing"X"Video phone"X

"Substitute image"X"Default"/"Select image"XI[Done]

• When "Select image" is selected, press D on "Select file" field. XC[List] and then select from the

images saved in "My picture" in "Data box".→P194

Response hold image

Setting the Response Hold Image

aM[Menu] X(Settings) X"Call/VT/Dialing" X"Video Phone"

X"Responseholdimage"X"Default"/"Select image"XI[Done]

• When "Select image" is selected, press D on "Select file" field. XC[List] and then select from the

images saved in "My picture" in "Data box".→P194

Holding image

Setting the Holding Image

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing"X"Video Phone"X

"Holding Image"X"Default"/"Select image"XI[Done]

• When "Select image" is selected, press D on "Select file" field. XC[List] and then select from the

images saved in "My picture" in "Data box".→P194

Video phone settings

Changing the Video Call Settings

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing "X"Video phone"X

"Videophone set"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Display setting]

Sets the output of the main window and sub window for the Video Phone.

Default Displaying setting : Me-Other Send camera image: On Screen size: Large Visual

preference: Normal Light: Always on Auto redial as voice: Off

Hand-free switch: On

Me-Other

Other-Me

Other only

Me only

: The caller's image is displayed on the main window, and your image on the sub window.

: Your image is displayed on the main window, and the caller's image on the sub window.

: Other Party's Image only displayed.

: Your image only displayed.

Voice/Videophone Calls

[Send camera image]

Sets whether one sends the other party one's image. When "Off" is set, the other party receives a

substitute image.

X"ON"/"OFF"

[Screen size]

Sets the display size of the main window.

X"Normal"/"Large"

[Visual preference]

Configures the preferences for the images sent to the other party

[Light]

Sets the talking screen's backlight level.

[Auto redial as voice]

You can set whether to automatically redial after switching to a voice call if the handset of the receiving

party does not support video calls.

X"ON"/"OFF"

[Hands-Free switch]

S et whether or not to do a Hands-free call during a video call.

X"ON"/"OFF"

cI[Done]

Prefer img qual

Standard

Prefer motion spd

: Set priority to sent image quality. Effective when there is little movement.

: Set the sent video quality and motion to standard.

: Set priority to motion for sent images. Effective when there is a lot of movement.

Always on

Terminal setting : Always stays on during a call.

: In accord with the "Light" in (Settings).→P103

Phonebook

About the Phonebook on the FOMA Handset ................................................................ 76

Saving to FOMA Hanset Phonebook............................................................................... 77

Saving UIM Contacts ........................................................................................................ 79

Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls ............................. 80

Saving/Editing a Group Name.......................................................................................... 81

Making a Call from the Phonebook .....................................................................Search 80

Viewing a Phonebook Entries.......................................................................................... 84

Editing the Phonebook Entries........................................................................................ 87

Deleting Contacts.............................................................................................................. 87

Checking the Phonebook Capacity and Utilization ................... Number of Contacts 88

Setting the Phonebook ..................................................................................................... 88

Call with the Least Number of Buttons ......................................Dialing Quick Search 89

Display the History of Call/Mail........................................................................................ 90

Phonebook

About the Phonebook on the FOMA Handset

There are 2 Phonebooks: one is saved on the FOMA handset (Phone) and the other is saved on

the UIM. The following can be saved/set for each phonebook.

Item FOMA handset phonebook UIM phonebook

Number of Entries Up to 1000 entries

(More than 700 entries) Up to 50 entries

Name Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch

characters Up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch

characters

Reading Up to 32 half-pitch characters Up to 12 full-pitch or 25 half-pitch

characters

Phone Number Only 5 Number Only 1 Number

Email address Only 3 address Only 1 address

Group Select from 31 types Select from 11 types

Image 1 image available Not available

Other setting items Secret code, Ring tone, Mail tone, URL,

Zip code, Home address, Company

name, Job title, Co. zip code, Office

address, Record message, Birthday,

Video call substitute image, Secret mode

setting (It is displayed when "Secret

mode" is set to "On".)

Not available

Note

• If you insert your UIM into another FOMA handset, your Phonebook data is available on it.

䂓䈍㗿䈇

• It is recommended for you to backup your Phonebook entries by taking them down on a paper...etc. If you

have a PC, your Phonebook data can be stored on your hard drive using DoCoMo keitaidatalinkand a

FOMA USB Cable (optional).

• Note that the service counter such as DoCoMo shop may not be able to copy data from your existing

FOMA handset to the new one, depending on the specifications.

Phonebook

Saving to FOMA Hanset Phonebook

aThe Stand-by displayXU(1+ seconds)

bPerform the following operations

[(Saveto)]

Select save location. This section explains the case where "Handset" is specified as the saving

destination. When "UIM" is specified as the saving destination, the UIM phonebook entry screen is

displayed. →P79

X"Handset"/"UIM"

[(MemoryNo.)]

The smallest un-assigned number is allocated to a new record automatically. You can still re-allocate it

to your favorite number from 000 to 999 manually.

XEnter Memory Number

[ Name]

Up to 16 full-pitch or 32 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, Pictograph,

symbol, alphanumeric character, or Katakana.

XEnter name

[Reading]

Enter or edit when necessary. Up to 32 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Katakana,

alphanumeric or symbol.

XEnter reading

[ Phone number]

Up to 26 digits can be entered.

XEnter the phone number

[ Mail address]

Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using alphanumeric characters or symbols.

XEnter a mail address

[ Secret code]䋪

Enter the security code, set the secret code. I When pressing [Release], the settings are deleted.

XEnter Secret code

[䉫䊦䊷䊒 (Group)]

You can select from among 31 types of groups, from "No group" or from "Group1" to "Group 30". Groups

can be used for a Group search (P83)

XSelect a group

[Image]

When sending/receiving calls, or when checking Phonebook data, set the screen image/i-motion/etc...

Character

My Pictures

i-motion

Still image photography

Terminal setting

䋺Set the Character. When H is pressed, each part (hair, face, top, bottom,

accessories, background) can be selected, J allows each item to be

selected. After setting, press C[Done].

䋺Select an image saved in "Image" in the "Data box".→P194

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

䋺Start the camera, and capture an image as a group image .→P129

In accord with the "Call display" settings.→P100

"Add to

phonebook"

screen

(FOMA handset

("Handset"))

Continue on the next page

Phonebook

[ Ringtone]

Select the ring tone played when receiving voice/video calls from the parties in Phonebook.

[ Mail tone]

Select a ring tone played when receiving mails from the parties in Phonebook.

[URL]

Up to 256 half-pitch characters can be entered.

XEnter URL

[Zipcode]

XEnter contact's postal code

[ Home address]

XEnter contact's home address

[ Company name]

XEnter contact's company name

[Jobtitle]

XEnter contact's title

[ Co. zip code]

XEnter contact's company postal code

[ Company Address]

XEnter contact's company address

[Memo]

Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, full-pitch or 200 half-pitch characters can be entered. Pictograph, symbol,

alphanumeric character, or Katakana. Up to 100

XEnter the memo

[(Birthday)]

XEnter birthday

[ Substitute image]

Sets the substitute image for the video call.

[ (Secret)]

This option appears when Secret mode setting (P117) is set to "Secret mode". Set this option to "On" if

you save the created Phonebook entry as secret data.

䋪䋺 For details on the Secret code, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide i-mode <FOMA>".

cI[Done]

Music

Melody

i-motion

Terminal setting

䋺Select a song saved in "Music" in the "Data box".→P224

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

䋺In accord with the "Select ring tone" settings.→P92

Music

Melody

i-motion

Terminal setting

䋺Select a song saved in "Music" in the "Data box".→P224

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

䋺In accord with the "Select ring tone" settings.→P92

Data box

Terminal setting䋺Select an image saved in "Image" in the "Data box".→P194

䋺In accord with the "Call display" settings.→P100

Phonebook

Saving UIM Contacts

a"Add to phonebook" screen (P77) X(Save to) field X

"UIM"

bPerform the following operations

[ Save to]

Select save location. When "Handset" is specified as the saving destination, the FOMA handset

(Handset) phonebook entry screen is displayed.→P79

X"Handset"/"UIM"

[ Name]

Up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, symbol,

alphanumeric character, or Katakana.

XEnter name

[Reading]

Up to 12 full-pitch or 25 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter or edit when necessary. Enter using

full-pitch katakana, half-pitch alphanumeric, or half-pitch symbol.

XEnter reading

[ Phone number]

For green or white UIM, up to 26 digits can be entered. For blue UIM, up to 20 digits can be entered.

XEnter the phone number

[ Mail address]

Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using alphanumeric characters or symbols.

XEnter a mail address

[䉫䊦䊷䊒 (Group)]

You can select from among 11 types of groups, from "No group" or from "Group1" to "Group 10".Groups

can be used for a Group search (P78)

XSelect a group

Note

• If you add a new mail address defined as "Phone number + secret code@docomo.ne.jp" to Phonebook, you

may not receive or send mails to that contact. Save the mail address in the format "Phone number@

docomo.ne.jp" first, then insert the Secret code.

• When the Secret mode setting (P117) is set to "Secret only mode", the Phonebook entry is saved as secret

data.

• The secret entry is shown only when the "Secret mode" is set to "On" or "Secret only mode".

• Secret entries cannot be saved in UIM Phonebooks.

• The names saved in the secret entries are shown in the Redial log, history, or mail list/detail screen only

when the "Secret mode" is set to "On" or "Secret only mode". The phone numbers and mail addresses are

shown when the "Secret mode" is set to "Off".

• When the "Secret mode" is set to "Off" , the name, image, melody applied to the secret contact will not be

used when you received a call or mail from the contact.

"Add to

phonebook"

screen

(UIM)

Phonebook

cI[Done]

Saving Contacts to the Phonebook from

Received or Dialed Calls

You can save entries to a Phonebook from the list or detail screens of call history, mail, SMS,

or bookmarks that contain a phone number, mail address, or URL. Also, you can save a phone

number currently being entered/displayed on the phone number entry screen or web site, etc.

aOpen the screen containing items to save

䂓To save phone numbers using "Dialed calls" list screen (P54), "Dialed calls" detail screen (P54),

"Received calls" list screen (P56), "Received calls" detail screen (P56):

Press M[Menu] X Select "Add to phonebook".

• To save phone numbers from the "Dialed calls" or "Received calls" list screen, select the target

number from the history first.

• If you already have the number in your Phonebook, the "Store" command will not be shown.

䂓To save phone numbers using the phone number entry screen

Press C[Save].

䂓To save the sender or recipient mail address

Press M[Menu] in the mail details screen X Select "Store" X "Add to phonebook".

• If there are several mail addresses, select the one to save first).

䂓To save items using other screens

Select an item or phone number on the screen and press M[Menu] X Select "Add to phonebook".

bPerform the following operations

[New registration]

Add a new entry to a Phonebook. Go to Step 3.

• "Add to phonebook" screen opens for the new entry.

[Add registration]

Add an item to a saved Phonebook entry. Press M[Menu] on the phonebook entry screen to change

the Phonebook search method.→P82

XSelect a Phonebook entry to edit.

• The updated "Add to phonebook" screen is displayed.

• When you edit Phonebook entries in UIM, the updated entry is displayed in the "Add to phonebook"

screen.

cModify/save Phonebook entries XI[Done]

• To save the entries, see Step 2 described in "Saving FOMA Handset (Phone) Contacts" (P77).

Note

• The data scanned from barcodes can be saved in a Phonebook, too.→P134

• If you attempt to input a string longer than the maximum number of characters allowed, a warning screen

notifying of the problem is displayed. Then, the truncated string will be shown in the "Add to phonebook"

screen.

Phonebook

Saving/Editing a Group Name

You can group the contacts in the FOMA handset Phonebook or UIM Phonebook. Up to 31

groups can be saved in the FOMA handset Phonebook, and up to 11 groups can be saved in

the UIM Phonebook. "No group" is ascribed to one group.

• "No Group" can not be edited.

• Only the category names and members can be saved/edited in the UIM Phonebook.

aM[Menu]X(Phonebook)X"Search phonebook"

X"Group search"XMove the cursor to the target

groupXI[Settings]

•I[UIM]/[Handset] : Switches between the handset and the UIM's group settings.

•J: Displays the selected group's setting.

• For the operations on the screen (Group List screen) that opens for "Group

search", see Step 2 in "Searching Phonebook" (P79)

bC[Settings]

cPerform the following operations

[ (Group name)]

Up to 10 full-pitch or 21 half-pitch characters can be entered. Enter using Kanji, Hiragana, pictographs

(E-Moji), symbols, or Katakana.

XEntering a group name

[ Ringtone]

Set the ringtone for a voice call.

䌛Mail tone]

Set the ring tone for when receiving mail.

Music

Melody

i-motion

Terminal setting

䋺Select a song saved in "Music" in the "Data box".→P224

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

䋺In accord with the "Select ring tone" settings.→P92

Music

Melody

i-motion

Terminal setting

䋺Select a song saved in "Music" in the "Data box".→P224

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

䋺In accord with the "Select ring tone" settings.→P92

Group Settings

List screen

Group Settings

Continue on the next page

Phonebook

[Image]

Add an image to a group.

[ Reject/Accept call]

Set to accept/reject calls by groups. To set this item, entering the security code is needed.

Enter the security code X"Accept call"/"Reject call"/"Not set"

dI[Done]

The same icon as on the "Add to phonebook" screen is displayed on each item.→P87

Sub Menu on the Group List Screen

aThe Group setting screen (P81) XM[Menu] XPerform the

following operations

[Reset]

Resets the selected group settings. Group name is restored to its default.

X"Yes"/"No"

[Move]

Changes the display position of the selected group.

XLocate the new display position XC[OK]

[Settings]

Edit the selected group settings.→P81

[Reset all]

Reset the group settings or group order.

X"Yes"/"No"

Search phonbook

Making a Call from the Phonebook

• When searching Phonebook entries set as secret, set "Secret mode" to "ON" in advance.→P117

Calling after Invoking the Phonebook

It is easy to make a call after invoking Phonebook.

My Pictures

i-motion

Still image photography

Terminal setting

䋺Select an image saved in "Image" in the "Data box".→P194

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

䋺Start the camera, and capture an image as a group image .→P129

䋺In accord with the "Call display" settings.→P100

Phonebook

aStand-by display XU

The contacts found by normal search appears in the Phonebook Contacts

List Screen.→P88

bSelect a Phonebook entry

The Phonebook details screen opens with the phone number displayed.

•C[Display] : From the Phone number display, press C[Send] to make a call.

䂓When multiple phone number is saved in the Phonebook entry.

• Press H to select the number to make a phone call to.

• Press A to select the number from the phone number selection screen. The selected number is

immediately called.

cI[Send]

䂓When making video call

M[Menu]X [Call function] X "Video call"

Searching Phonebook

You have various ways to search phonebook.

aM[Menu] X(Phonebook) X"Search

phonebook"

•I[Default] : Search method at the cursol is set to the search

method of Phonebook list screen which is displayed when you

press U on the Stand-by screen. is displayed to the set search

method.

bPerform the following operation

[Search all data]

Displays all Phonebook entries for readings starting with (䈅line to 䉒 line) line and "others" (for readings

other than the Japanese Kana syllables.

•Press

J to switch the reading line.

• You can switch the displayed line by pressing the keys 1 to 0,*(䈅line to 䉒 line, and others)

corresponding to reading lines.

XSelect a reading line

[Group search]

Phonebook entries are searched/displayed with respect to each group (Group List Screen). Switch

between FOMA handset (Handset) Phonebook and UIM Phonebook by J. Select a group with

HXC[Select], Phonebook entries saved in each group are displayed.

• In the group list screen, you can perform the following operation.

- Scroll the screen by page using F/E.

- Move the cursor by entering a group number (1 to 20) with dial keys.

XSelect a group

Note

• If the "Secret mode" is set to "Secret only mode" (P117), only Phonebook entries set as Secret (P78) can

be searched/displayed.

Phonebook

Contacts List

Screen

(Example:When

searching all

data)

"Search

phonebook"

screen

The usual

search method

is displayed.

Phonebook

[Reading search]

Enter a part of the contact name "reading" to be search all the Phonebook entries. Up to 32 half-pitch

characters can be entered for a reading.

• All Phonebook entries are displayed when a reading is not entered.

• You can search readings using other than the leading characters.

XEnter reading

[Memory No. search]

All the Phonebook entries in the FOMA handset (phone) is displayed every 50 entries.

•J to switch the display of memory number.

• The UIM Phonebook entries can not be displayed.

• The Phonebook entries can also be displayed by entering memory numbers with dial keys.

XSelect the memory memory number display tab

[Phone number?]

Enter a part of the phone number saved to search all the Phonebook entries. Up to 26 digits can be

entered for a phone number.

• All the Phonebook entries are displayed when a phone number is not entered for a number search.

• You can search phone numbers using other than the leading numbers.

XEnter the phone number

[Domain?]

Sort the Phonebook entries by domain name within the mail address.

• Press J to switch the target domain.

• Register a domain to be searched in advance.→P88

XSelect a domain

Sub Menu on the Group List Screen

a"Searchphonebook"screen(P82)X"Group search" XM[Menu]

Xperform the following operation.

[View UIM/View Phonebook data]

Swithches between the UIM Phonebook and FOMA handset (Phone) Phonebook group search screen

and display them.

[Settings]

The Group setting screen (P81) is displayed.

[Select]

Select the group at the cursor to search.

Viewing a Phonebook Entries

aStand-by display XU

aSave locations for the Phonebook entries

Saved in the handset Phonebook䋪

Saved in the UIM Phonebook

䋪䋺 An icon representing "Phone Number 1" is displayed.

bPhonebook entry's image screen

When an image is assigned to the phonebook entry, it is displayed on the

screen.

Phonebook list

screen

Phonebook

bSelect a Phonebook entry

• When an image is assigned to the phonebook entry, it is displayed on the screen.

• The same icon as on the "Add to phonebook" screen is displayed on each item.→

P77

Operations on the Phonebook list screen

Selecting the Phonebook entry in which a phone number or a mail address is saved,

pressA to make a call, press I[Mail] to sends a mail. If multiple phone numbers or mail

addresses are registered, the Phone number or mail address selection screen opens.

Operations on the Phonebook details screen

Selecting a saved phone number, mail address, or URL display the following items at the lower right screen,

and you can perform the following operations by pressing I.

Send : Make a call to the selected phone number.

Mail : Create a message and send it to the selected phone number/mail address.→P161

Connect : Connect to the site of the selected URL.

Sub Menu in the Phonebook List Screen

aPhonebook list screen (P84) XM[Menu] XPerform the

following operations

[Mail/URL]

Create mail or access URL.

[Call function]

Selects the calling method. If multiple phone numbers are saved, after selecting the calling method,

select the number from the phone number selection screen.

[Add new]

Create a new Phonebook entry.→P77

[Edit]

Edit the selected contact.→P87

[Copy]

Copy or back up the selected contact.

Compose mail

Attach to mail

Compose message

Connect to URL

䋺Create an i-mode mail address to the selected mail address or phone number.

→P161

䋺Create an i-mode mail with the selected Phonebook entry attached.→P161

䋺Create a short message address to the phone number in the selected phonebook.

→P181

䋺Connect to the URL saved in the currently selected entry.

Video Call

Customize call

International Call (Japan)

䋺Make a Video Phone.

䋺XMake a call changing the registered phone number. L on the Phone

number entry screen XK to move the cursor to the digit to change X

change the number XA

䋺If you make a call to a phone number saved in the phonebook from

overseas, the Country Code for Japan "+81" is added automatically at the

beginning of the phone number.

• If the phone number has a leading "0", it is automatically deleted.

to the UIM䋪1

to the phone䋪2

to microSD

Backup

䋺Copy the selected contact to UIM.

䋺Copy the selected contact to the handset.

䋺Copy the selected contact to a microSD memory card.

䋺Copy all data to a microSD card as a backup.

• Images saved in the Phonebook cannot be copied.

Phonebook

details screen

Phonebook

[Delete]

Delete saved data in the Phonebook.

[Multiple choice]

Select multiple contacts to copy or delete them. After you select the storage location to save multiple

phonebook entries from "Handset"/"UIM"(FOMA handset (Handset) Phonebook/UIM Phonebook),

perform the following operations.

XCheck off the contacts to be selected XM[Menu]

[Search by]

Temporarily change the Phonebook search method.→P83

[Send Ir data]

Send a contact to an external device using infrared transmission.→P212

[Create domain list]

Create a domain to be searched using "Domain search".→P88

㶎1䋺 Displayed when using the handset phonebook.

㶎2䋺 Displayed when using the UIM phonebook.

Sub Menu in the Phonebook Details Screen

aPhonebook details screen (P85) XM[Menu] XPerform the

following operations

[Mail/URL]

Create mail or access URL.

[Call function]

Selects the calling method.

[Edit]

Edit the displayed contact.→P87

Delete

all in phone

all in UIM

䋺Delete the selected Phonebook entry.

䋺Delete all Phonebook data on the handset.

䋺Delete all Phonebook data on the UIM.

Copy to UIM䋪1

Copy to phone 䋪2

Copy to microSD

Delete

Mark/Unmark

䋺Copy the selected contact to UIM.

䋺Copy the selected contact to the handset.

䋺Copy the selected contact to a microSD memory card.

䋺Delete the selected Phonebook entry.

䋺Delete all of saved data in the Phonebook.

Focused data

all in phone

all in UIM

䋺Send the selected contact.

䋺Send all data saved in the handset Phonebook.

䋺Send all data saved in the UIM Phonebook.

Compose mail

Attach to mail

Compose message

Connect to URL

䋺Create an i-mode mail address to the the mail address or phone number in the

displayed (current) contact.→P161

䋺Create an i-mode mail with the displayed contact data attached.→P161

䋺Create a short message address to the phone number in the displayed contact.

→P181

䋺Access to the URL saved in the selected contact.

Video Call

Customize call

International Call (Japan)

䋺Make a Video Phone.

䋺Make a call changing the registered phone number.

XL on the Phone number entry screen XK to move the cursor to the

digit to change X change the number XA

䋺If you make a call to a phone number saved in the phonebook from

overseas, the Country Code for Japan "+81" is added automatically at the

beginning of the phone number.

• If the phone number has a leading "0", it is automatically deleted.

Phonebook

[Copy]

Copy the displayed contact.

[Delete]

Delete the displayed contact.

X"Yes"/"No"

[Send Ir data]

Send the displayed contact using infrared transmission.→P212

X"Yes"/"No"

[Accept/Reject call]

Select to accept or reject calls by the phone numbers in the FOMA handset "Handset" phonebook

The phone number saved in the "Reject on List"(P119) cannot be set to "Accept".

XEnter security code XHto select item XI[Settings/Set as]

㶎1䋺 Displayed when using the handset phonebook.

㶎2䋺 Displayed when using the UIM phonebook.

Editing the Phonebook Entries

aPhonebook details screen (P85) XM[Menu] X[Edit] XEdit the

entries.

See "Saving FOMA Handset (Phone) Contacts" (P77) or "Saving UIM Contacts" (P79) on

how to edit the desired entry.

䂓When saving a Phonebook contact to another memory number.

A new memory number is added if you edit and save the existing memory number, leaving the

original contact data as is.

XXEnter any un-assigned memory number (000-999)

bPress I[Done] when finished.

䂓When saving in UIM

Edited entries are overwritten.

XI[Done] X "Yes"

Deleting Contacts

Deleting Individual or All Entries

Example: To delete a Phonebook entry from the Phonebook contacts list screen

aMovethe cursor to deleteaPhonebook contact on thePhonebook

list (P84) screen XM[Menu]X"Delete" XSelect a deleting

method

Delete 䋺 Delete the selected Phonebook entry.

all in phone䋺 Delete all Phonebook entries saved in the FOMA handset. The security code is required

to delete.

all in UIM 䋺 Delete all Phonebook entries saved on the UIM. The security code is required to delete.

to the UIM䋪1

to the phone䋪2

to microSD

䋺Copy the displayed contact to UIM.

䋺Copy the displayed contact to the handset.

䋺Copy the displayed contact to a microSD memory card.

Phone Number

In-call arrival action

䋺Press J to select a desired phone number.

䋺Press J to select the in-call arrival action (Not set /Reject call/Accept call).

Phonebook

b"Yes"

The selected/displayed Phonebook entry will be deleted.

䂓To delete a Phonebook entry from the Phonebook detail list screen

You can delete Phonebook entries one at a time.

Phonebook detail screen (P84) XM[Menu] X "Delete" X "Yes"

Selecting and Deleting Multiple Contacts

• If either of the handset (Phone) Phonebook or UIM Phonebook is displayed, contacts are deleted from the

displayed (active) Phonebook.

aPhonebooklist screen(P84)XM[Menu] X[Multiple

choice] X"Handset"/"UIM"

bSelect the contacts to be deleted XM[Menu] X

"Delete"

• Put check marks at all unnecessary contacts, then select "Delete".

c"Yes"

The selected contacts will be deleted.

Number of Contacts

Checking the Phonebook Capacity and Utilization

You can check the available space on the handset/UIM Phonebook.

aM[Menu] X(Phonebook) X"No. of Phonebook"

• "Secret entry" is shown when the secret mode is set to "Secret mode" or "Secret

only mode".

Setting the Phonebook

You can configure Phonebooks or images to be invoked from the Stand-by display.

aM[Menu] X(Phonebook) X"PhoneBook

settings"

Multiple choice

screen

(when deleting

contacts)

"No. of

Phonebook"

screen

"PhoneBook

settings" screen

Phonebook

bPerform the following operation

[Default mode]

Search method for invoking the Phonebook list screen directly from the Stand-by display.

XSelect search method

[Create domain list]

Create a domain to be searched using "Domain search". Enter a domain name selecting items that are

not in the list.

XEnter a domain name XC[Set]

[Display image]

Set whether to display image assigned to the Phonebook or not.

X"Show" / "Do not show"

To edit the domain name

Select the domain you want to edit from the list XC[Select] X Edit the domain name.

You cannot edit "docomo.ne.jp" on that domain.

To Delete the set Domain Name

Select the domain you want to delete from the list XM[Menu] X Select "Delete"

Dialing Quick Search

Call with the Least Number of Buttons

As you are in the Stand-by display, you can make a call easily using dial keys by dialing one or

two digits number which is a memory number from "0" to "99" which corresponds to the phone

number in the Phonebook.

Example: To find a Phonebook entry by entering a memory number<

aEnter one or two digits numberXA

The content of the Phonebook entry of the corresponding

memory number which is entered is displayed and a call

is made to that number.

䂓If you enter 3 or more digits

The phone numbers saved in the Phonebook containing the

entered number sequence will be displayed. DXH to select

a phone number and press A.

•M[Menu] : Display the sub menu of the phone number entry screen.→P52

•C[Save] : Add a new or extra phone number to Phonebook.

→P80

•I[Mail] : If you enter a 1 or 2 digit number, an i-mode mail with the address found in the numbered

memory address will be created. If you enter 3 or more digits, an i-mode mail can be created to an

address containing the entered number sequence.

•H : When you enter a 1 or 2 digit number, the Phonebook entries assigned to the previous and

subsequent memory numbers will be displayed. If you enter 3 or more digits, you can select to call

from phone numbers containing the same sequence.

•J : If the entered number has 1 or 2 digits, you can select from phone numbers from phone numbers

saved in the entry at the numbered memory address.

Note

• When "Dialing Quick Search" in the "Dialing" is set to "Off", this option does not function.→P101

• This function does not work when you enter a 2-digit number which begins with "0" such as "01" because it

is not recognized as a memory number.

The content of

the Phonebook

entry of the

entered phone

number or the

corresponding

memory

number is

displayed.

Phonebook

Display the History of Call/Mail

aM[Menu] X(Phonebook)X[Call/Mail history] XSelect the

log to be displayed

Received Calls 䋺 Show logs for Voice/Video calls.

Redial 䋺 Show redial logs for Voice/Video calls.

Received mails 䋺 Displays the Received mails.

Sent mails 䋺 Displays the Sent mails.

Note

• Received mails can be accessed from the Stand-by display by pressing L.→P56

• Redial can be accessed from the Stand-by display by pressing R.→P54

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Tone Settings

Changing the Ring Tone.......................................................................Select ring tone 92

Changing the Ringer Volume.............................................................................. Volume 94

Vibrating Instead of Ring tone or Alarm ..........................................Vibration settings 95

Setting the Sound When a Key is Pressed ..................................Select Effect Sound 96

Having a FOMA Terminal Warn You Before a Call Drops Out .............. Quality alarm 97

Setting Ring Time Duration for Receiving Mails ...........................Mail Ring Duration 97

Muting Handset Tones..............................................................................Manner mode 97

Changing Manner Mode ......................................................................Manner Settings 98

Screen/Light Settings

Changing Stand-by Display ................................................................. Set as stand-by 99

Setting the Image When Receiving a Call...................................................Call display 100

Setting the Screen When Dialing.........................................................................Dialing 101

Displaying a Wake-up Message..........................................................Wake-up display 102

Displaying an Image Saved in the Phonebook on the Incoming Call

<Display phonebook image> ............................................. Display phonebook image 102

Setting the Back Light of Display ................................................................. Back Light 103

Displaying in the Power Saving Mode ........................................... Power saver mode 103

Setting the Display Color .......................................................................... Color Theme 103

Changing the Appearance of Main Menu...............................................Menu settings 104

Setting Incoming Call Light.................................................. Illumination dot Settings 105

Setting Time Format .............................................................................. Set Date&Time 106

Switching the Display Language to English...................................... Select language 107

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Select ring tone

Changing the Ring Tone

You can change the ring tone for Voice/Video calls, mails, etc.

• In addition to the pre-installed ring tones and melodies, i-motion programs, melodies and Chaku-Uta®,

Chaku-Uta-Full® downloaded from i-mode sites or websites can be set as ring tones.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Sounds&Vibration" X

"Select ring tone"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : The ring tone screen of the selected item opens.

[Ring tone]

Select the ring tone for a voice call.

[Video call]

Select the ring tone for a video call.

[Mail/Message/SMS]

Select the Mail tone for a mail.

[Message R]

Select the ring tone for a Message R.

[Message F]

Select the ring tone for a Message F.

[SMS tone]

Select the ring tone for SMS.

Default Ring tone: Ring01䇭Video ring tone: Ring02䇭Mail/Message/SMS Volume: Message01

MessageR: Message02䇭Message F: Message03

SMS ring tone: Message04

Music

i-motion

Melody

䋺Select from music data saved in "Music" in the "Data box" .→P224

䋺Select a movie/i-motion saved in "i-motion" in the "Data box".→P201

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

Music

i-motion

Melody

䋺Select from music data saved in "Music" in the "Data box" .→P224

䋺Select a movie/i-motion saved in "i-motion" in the "Data box".→P201

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

Music

i-motion

Melody

䋺Select from music data saved in "Music" in the "Data box" .→P224

䋺Select a movie/i-motion saved in "i-motion" in the "Data box".→P201

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

Music

i-motion

Melody

䋺Select from music data saved in "Music" in the "Data box" .→P224

䋺Select a movie/i-motion saved in "i-motion" in the "Data box".→P201

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

Music

i-motion

Melody

䋺Select from music data saved in "Music" in the "Data box" .→P224

䋺Select a movie/i-motion saved in "i-motion" in the "Data box".→P201

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

Music

i-motion

Melody

䋺Select from music data saved in "Music" in the "Data box" .→P224

䋺Select a movie/i-motion saved in "i-motion" in the "Data box".→P201

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

Ring tone

Selection screen

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

cI[Done]

List of the Ring tone (Pre-installed)

• Each melody is the copyright of LG ELECTRONICS.

Note

• The ringtone is displayed as its file name.

• The following file formats can be set for the ring tone (but some files such as restricted files or files including

only movies or sounds may not be set).

SMF, MFi, MP4 (Mobile MP4), AMR

• When the Ringtone is set to Videos/i-Motions, the "Call display"(P100) will be changed to the same.

• Audio only Videos/i-Motions can be set for "Mail", "Message F", "Message R" and "SMS".

• An Videos/i-Motions included with movie only cannot be set as the ring tone.

A Mystique Message03 Ring03

A Red Sky Message04 Ring04

Alarm01 Morning Dew Ring05

Alarm02 Musette Show My Love

Alarm03 New Wave Stand Tall

Alarm04 Next Time Statlight

Bell of Temple Piacer d'amor Steppers

Cigar and Wine Pocket Watch Stranger

Csardas Power Off Sunday Morning

Go Go Cart Power On Tail of Light

Higher Right on Wake Me up

Message01 Ring01

Message02 Ring02

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Volume

Changing the Ringer Volume

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Sounds&Vibration"X

"Volume"

bPerform the following operation

•J : Adjust the volume of the selected item. When the volume level is lowest, "Silent" is displayed and

the sound is not emitted. Every time the volume is adjusted, the tone for the item sounds in the new

volume.(Except "Receiver volume")

•C[Select] : Volume Setting screen of the selected item is displayed

[Ring tone]

Adjust the incoming call volume for voice/video call.

[Mail/Message/SMS]

Adjust the incoming tone volume for Mail/Message R/F/SMS.

[Alarm/Schedule]

Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.

[Dial sound]

Adjust the dial sound volume

[Slide tone]

Adjust the volume when the FOMA handset is opened.

[Key tone]

Adjust the volume of keypad sound except dial tone and munu effect.

[Menu effect]

Adjust the volume for main menu operation.

[Power On/Off]

Adjust the volume when the handset is turned on/off.

[Popup tone]

Adjusts the volume when the popup window is displayed.

[Receiver volume]

Adjust the earpiece volume during a call. It can not mute the sound.

cI[Done]

Default (All) Level 3

Volume Setting

screen

To be replaced

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Vibration settings

Vibrating Instead of Ring tone or Alarm

You can set the handset to vibrate when a call or mail arrives or at a Schedule alarm time.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Sounds&Vibration"X

"Vibrator"

bPerform the following operation

•J : Set the vibrate pattern of the selected item. Every time the vibration patter is changed, the

handset vibrates in the new pattern.

•C[List] : Vibrate pattern setting screen of the selected item is shown.

[Incoming call]

Sets the vibration pattern for voice/video call.

[Mail/Message/SMS]

Sets the vibration pattern for receiving mail/message R/F.

[Alarm/Schedule]

Sets the vibration pattern for the Alarm/schedule alert.

cI[Done]

Default (All) Off

Off

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

䋺The handset does not vibrate.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 0.5 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 1 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 3 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

Off

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

䋺The handset does not vibrate.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 0.5 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 1 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 3 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

Off

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

䋺The handset does not vibrate.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 0.5 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 1 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 3 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

Vibrate Setting

screen

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Select Effect Sound

Setting the Sound When a Key is Pressed

You can set the effect sound when a key is pressed or a function is performed.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Sounds&Vibration"X

"Select effect tone"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items of the selected item is displayed.

[Dial sound]䋪

Selects the effect sound when dial keys are pressed on the Stand-by screen or the Phone number entry

screen. If set to "Japanese", "English", or "Korean", the numbers entered with dial keys will be read out.

X"Japanese"/"English"/"Korean"/"Digital tone"

[Slide tone]䋪

Selects the effect sound when the FOMA handset is opened.

X"Slide tone 1"/"Slide tone 2"/Slide tone 3"/"Slide tone 4"

[Keypad sound]䋪

Select sound effects that sound when a key is pressed other than the Dial sound and Menu effect.

X"@@Keypad sound 1"/"Keypad sound 2"/"Keypad sound 3"/"Keypad sound 4@@"

[Menu effect]䋪

Selects the effect sound when a main menu is selected.

X"Menu effect 1"/"Menu effect 2"/"Menu effect 3"/"Menu effect 4"

[Power On]

Selects the effect sound when the handset is turn on.

[Power off]

Selects the effect sound when the handset is turned off.

[Low battery alert]

Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level is low.

X"ON"/"OFF"

Default Dial sound: Japanese Slide tone: Slide tone 1 Keypad tone: Keypad tone 1 Menu effect:

Menu effect 1 Power On: Power On Power Off: Power Off Low battery alert: On

Music

i-motion

Melody

䋺Select from music data saved in "Music" in the "Data box" .→P224

䋺Select a movie/i-motion saved in "i-motion" in the "Data box".→P201

䍃Videos/i-motion movies with only graphics cannot be set.

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

Music

i-motion

Melody

䋺Select from music data saved in "Music" in the "Data box" .→P224

䋺Select a movie/i-motion saved in "i-motion" in the "Data box".→P201

䍃Videos/i-motion movies with only graphics cannot be set.

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Melody" in the "Data box".→P204

Select Effect

To be replaced

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

䋪䋺 Press M[Play} on the Sound effect select screen to sound the sound effect selected by using J.

Press M[Mute] not to sound a tone. You can also check the sound effect by pressing I[Play]

and H on the Sound effect list screen.

cI[Done]

Quality alarm

Having a FOMA Terminal Warn You Before a

Call Drops Out

A FOMA handset uses this function to sound an alarm tone during a voice or videophone call

warning you that the signal quality is deteriorating and the call is likely to drop out.

• If the signal rapidly deteriorates, the call may be drop out without warning.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing"X"Call feature"X

"Quality alarm"X"High alarm"/"Low alarm"/"Alarm off"

Mail Ring Duration

Setting Ring Time Duration for Receiving Mails

You can set how many times or for how long the ring tone sounds when mail arrives.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Sounds&Vibration"X"Mail ring

duration"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Mail ring]

cI[Done]

Manner mode

Muting Handset Tones

Turn off the tones that sound from the handset so as not to disturb others.

a#(for 1 + seconds) or U(for 1 + seconds)X"Yes"

To cancel Manner Mode

Press # (for 1 + seconds) or select F(for 1 + seconds) X "Yes" at the Stand-by display.

Default High alarm

Default 1࿁

Off

Once

Select time

䋺Sets not to sound a ring tone.

䋺Set to sound the ring tone once.

䋺Set the duration of the ring tone. D Enter ring time between 1-30 seconds in the ring time

field

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Manner Settings

Changing Manner Mode

Selects the action of Manner Mode from "General manner" or "Original manner mode".

The setting of the set Manner mode can be changed for the Original manner mode.

Example: To change the settings of the Original manner mode

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Sounds&Vibration"X

"Manner settings"X"Original manner mode"XI

[Edit]

䂓To select the Manner mode type

"Manner mode"/"Original manner mode"X Press C

The Manner mode setting will terminate.

bPerform the following operation

•J : Select the vibrate pattern or volume of the selected item. When the volume level is lowest, "Silent"

is displayed and the sound is not emitted.

•C[List] : Vibration pattern and their volume setting screen of the selected item is displayed.

[Incoming call vib.]

Sets the vibration pattern for voice/video call.

[Mail/SMS vib.]

Sets the vibration pattern for receiving mail/message R/F.

[Alarm/Schedule vib.]

Sets the vibration pattern for the Alarm/schedule alert.

[Incoming call vol.]

Adjust the incoming call volume for voice/video call.

Note

• There are 2 types of Manner Mode: "General manner" and "Original manner mode".→P98

• appears at the top of the screen when Manner Mode is activated.

• A notification screen appears when you try to play a melody, video or i-motion, while Manner Mode is

activated.

• Even when Manner Mode is activated, the camera shutter tone sounds.

Default Manner Mode

Off

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

䋺The handset does not vibrate.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 0.5 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 1 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 3 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

Off

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

䋺The handset does not vibrate.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 0.5 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 1 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 3 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

Off

Pattern 1

Pattern 2

Pattern 3

䋺The handset does not vibrate.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 0.5 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 1 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

䋺The handset repeatedly vibrates for 3 seconds, then stops vibrating for 0.5 seconds.

Originalmanner

mode setting

screen

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Mail/SMS vol.]

Adjust the incoming tone volume for Mail/Message R/F/SMS.

[Alarm/Schedule vol.]

Adjust the alarm tone volume for Alarm/Schedule.

[Effect/Popup tone]

Adjusts the effect sound or volume when the popup is displayed.

[Low battery alert]

Set whether to sound an alarm when the battery level is low.

X"On" / "Off"

cI[Done]

Set as stand-by

Changing Stand-by Display

Sets the items (Time, Calender, Schedule, Shortcuts, Wallpaper) to be shown on the Stand-by

display.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Display"X"Set as

stand-by"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items screen of the selected item is displayed.

•M[Preview] : The selected preview screen is displayed.

[Wallpaper]

Sets the image to be displayed on the Wallpaper screen.

XDXon the image name field, C[List]XSelect image data

[Display items]

Sets the display of Clock or Calendar on the Stand-by display.

Default Wallpaper: Image, illusion Display items: Clock Clock type: Large digital

Show shortcut icons: ON䇭

Image

i-motion 䋺Select an image saved in "Image" in the "Data box".→P194

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

Do not show:

Clock:

Calendar:

䋺Do not display the Clock or the Calendar.

䋺Display the Clock.

䋺Display the calendar.*1

䍃You can display the calendar Schedule screen on the Stand-by screen (P234) by

performing XCX Display a calendar XC[OK]

Calendar + Schedule:

䋺Display a calendar and schedule events for today.*2

䍃You can view the schedule list screen from the Stand-by screen (P234) by performing

XCX Display a Schedule XC[OK] . Also, the calendar screen of Schedule (P234)

can be displayed from the Stand-by screen by performing the same steps as in setting

the "Calendar".

Stand-by display

screen

Continue on the next page

100

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Clock type]䋪2

Sets the displaying method of the Clock type.

• The following screen will be displayed from the Stand-by screen by performing XCX Clock type

XC[OK]

- If "Small Digital", "Large Digital" or "Analog" is set Alarm List Screen (P231) can be displayed.

- If "Dual clock" is set

If you select a clock for the Home city (P240), the "Time and Date Settings Screen"(P47) is displayed.

If you select a second City, "Stand-by display" opens.

[Clock font color]䋪3

Sets the font color of the Clock.

XJselects the color.

[Sub clock]䋪4

Set the city for the second clock.

XC[List]XSelect a city by using J

[Show shortcut icons]

Set whether to display the function mark (shortcut icons) assigned to each key of the touchpad to the

Stand-by display.→P33

X"ON"/"OFF"

䋪1䋺 Can not selected if a Flash movie is set as wallpaper.

䋪2䋺Shown when "Clock" is selected on "Display items" menu.

䋪3䋺 Shown when "Dual clock" is selected on "Clock type" menu.

䋪4䋺 Shown when "Small digital" is selected on "Clock type" menu.

cI[Done]

Call display

Setting the Image When Receiving a Call

Sets the image shown on the screen when receiving a call.

aM[Menu]X"Settings"X"Display"X"Call display".

Small Digital

Large digital

Analog

Dual clock

䋺Shrinks the digital clock to fit to screen.

䋺Enlarge the digital clock to fit to the screen.

䋺Sets to display the analog clock on the screen.

䋺Displays the time/date for two cities on the Stand-by display. Selects the second city to

be displayed on the bottom of screen from the "2-nd City" menu.

Note

• Some images/Movies/i-motion may not be set for the Stand-by display.

• The Movies/i-motion movie set for the Stand-by display is played when the FOMA handset is opened and

stops when the handset is closed. When the FOMA handset is opened, use P to play or stop the i-motion

movie.

• Web To function from Movies/i-motion set to the Stand-by display is not available.

Default Incoming voice call: Image, incoming_call_black Incoming video call: Image,

incoming_call_black

Call display

Setting screen

101

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items screen of the selected item is displayed.

•M[Preview] : The selected preview screen is displayed.

[Incoming voice call]

Sets the image shown on the screen when receiving a voice call.

XDXon the image name field, C[List]XSelect image data

[Incoming video call]

Sets the image to be displayed on the incoming voice call screen.

XDXon the image name field, C[List]XSelect image data

cI[Done]

Dialing

Setting the Screen When Dialing

Sets the screen to enter numbers on the Stand-by display.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Display"X"Dialing"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items screen of the selected item is displayed.

[Motion dialing]

Sets the display method of the entered numbers.

[Dialing Quick Search]

When the number is entered 1 digit or 2 digits, sets whether to search the Phonebook entry of

corresponding registration number.

X"On"/"Off"

Image

i-motion䋺Select an image saved in "Image" in the "Data box".→P194

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

Image

i-motion䋺Select an image saved in "Image" in the "Data box".→P194

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

Note

• Movies/i-motion that includes sounds only cannot be set as the Call display.

• When the Call display is set to Movies/i-motion, the "Select ring tone"(P92) will be changed to the same.

• If you change the setting of Incoming call screen from the movies or i-motion which has sound to which does

not, the ring tone settings goes back to the previous settings automatically.

Default Motion dialing: Digital Dialing Quick Search: ON

Digital

Picture

Off

䋺Display in digital design.

䋺Display in painting design.

䋺Display in no effect.

Dialing screen

To be

Continue on the next page

102

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Dialing font color]

Sets the font color of the number entered when "Motion dialing" is set to "OFF".

XSelect Dialing font color

cI[Done]

Wake-up display

Displaying a Wake-up Message

You can display a greeting when you turn the handset power on.

aM[Menu]X"Settings"X"Display"X"Wake-up display"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

•M[Preview] : The selected screen is shown

[Wake-up display]

Sets the image shown on the screen when the handset is starting.

XDXon the image name field, C[List]XSelect image data

cI[Done]

Display phonebook image

Displaying an Image Saved in the Phonebook on

the Incoming Call <Display phonebook image>

When a call with the Caller ID from the other party saved in the phonebook arrives, you can

display the image set in the phonebook.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dial"X"Incoming call"X

"Display phonebook image"X"On"/"Off"

Default Image, pwron

Image

i-motion 䋺Select an image saved in "Image" in the "Data box".→P194

䋺Select a movie/i-mode saved in "i-motion" in "Data box".→P201

Default On

Note

• The priority order for image display on an incoming call is as follows:

aImage set in the Phonebook bImage set for Group in the Phonebook cImage set for Call display

103

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Back Light

Setting the Back Light of Display

You can set the Display backlight (Backlight).

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Display"X"Light"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items screen of the selected item is displayed.

[Display duration]

Set the Display backlight duration of the Display between 5-30 seconds.

XEnter Display duration

[Display brightness]

Sets the backlight level of the Display.

X"100%"/"80%"/"60%"/"40%"

[AC connected]

Sets the brightness when the AC charger is connected.

cI[Done]

Power saver mode

Displaying in the Power Saving Mode

Sets the backlight level of the Display to the power saving mode of the lowest level.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Others"X"Power saver mode"X

"ON"/"OFF"

Color Theme

Setting the Display Color

You can select a combination of screen colors and a menu format.

aM[Menu]X"Settings"X"Display"X"Color theme"X

"Illumination dot"/"Equalizer line"

Illumination dot 䋺 Displays the menu in icon shape list with the black-based color scheme.

Equalizer line 䋺 Displays the menu in list with bright blue and gray-based color.

Default Display duration: 10 Seconds Display brightness: 100% AC Connected: Display setting

Terminal setting

Always on

䋺In accordance with the setting in "Display duration" and "Display brightness".

䋺Light is always on.

Default Off

Default Illumination dot

104

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Menu settings

Changing the Appearance of Main Menu

Menu guidance

Showing Guidance of Main Menu

You can set whether display the guidance of an icon selected on Main Menu.

aSelect M[Menu]X(Settings)X"Display"X"Menu settings"X

"Menu guidance"X"ON"/"OFF"

Menu Customization

Changing the Display Method of Main Menu

You can change the display of the Main menu. Also, you can save up to two combinations of

Main menu icons.

Example: Changing a combination of Main menu icons

aSelect M[Menu]X(Settings)X"Display"X"Menu

settings"X"Menu customization"X"Customize 1"/

"Customize 2"

Select a saving destination for combinations of icons from "Customize 1"

or "Customize 2".

• To open a preview screen of the main menu, move the cursor to an item to change

and press M[Preview] on the "Menu customization" screen.

䂓When you do not wish to change the combination of icons

Select "Color theme".

The Main menu display will be in accord with the "Color Theme".

Menu customization will terminate.

bMove cursor to an icons to changeXC[Change]XSelect new

iconXI[Done]X"Yes"

Select an icon from images saved in "My picture" in the "Data box"

䂓To cancel changing of the icons

Select "No" on the confirmation screen for saving.

To initialize the main menu to the default settings

On the customize screen you want to restore M[Menu]X"Restore to default"XSelect "Yes"

Default On

Default Color theme

Note

• Images smaller than 80 x 70 in pixels can be used as icons for customization.

Customize

screen

105

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Illumination dot Settings

Setting Incoming Call Light

You can set the incoming or alarm illumination to On or Off, or set a combination of illumination

colors for each item.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Display"X"Lighting LED"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items screen of the selected item is displayed.

•M[Preview] : The selected lighting pattern is displayed.

[Lighting]

Sets whether to light/blink the light of the illumination.

X"ON"/"OFF"

[Incoming voice call]

Sets illumination pattern/color when receiving a call.

XSelect pattern

[Incoming video call]

Sets illumination pattern/color when receiving a video call.

XSelect pattern

[New mail]

Sets illumination pattern/color when receiving a new mail.

XSelect pattern

[New message R]

Sets illumination pattern/color when receiving a new message R.

XSelect pattern

[New message F]

Sets illumination pattern/color when receiving a new message F.

XSelect pattern

[New SMS]

Sets illumination pattern/color when receiving a new SMS.

XSelect pattern

[New Voice mail]

Sets illumination pattern/color when playing a Voice mail message.

XSelect pattern

[New Record message]

Sets illumination pattern/color when playing Record message.

XSelect pattern

[Playing music]

Sets illumination pattern/color when playing music.

XSelect pattern

Default

Lighting: ON Incoming voice call: Red Incoming video call: Red & White New mail: Blue

New message R: Blue & White

New message F: Yellow & Pink New SMS: Yellow & Aqua Voice mail: Pink & White

Record message: Green & Yellow Playing music: Pink & Aqua Alarm; Blue & Pink & Aqua

Schedule/To Do list: Blue & Pink & Aqua

Unread message: OFF

106

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

[Alarm]

Sets illumination pattern/color when an alarm is activated.

XSelect pattern

[Schedule/To do list]

Sets illumination pattern/color for the set time of Schedule/To do list.

XSelect pattern

[During call]

Sets illumination pattern/color during a call.

XSelect pattern

[Missed call]

Sets whether to light the call indicator if you could not answer a call.

XON/OFF

[Unread message]

Sets whether to light the call indicator when an unread message remains.

XON/OFF

cI[Done]

Set Date&Time

Setting Time Format

You can set the display format for date/time.

[Menu]

(Settings)

"Date&Time"

"Date&Time format"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List]: List of the items screen of the selected item is displayed.

[Date format]

Set the display format for the date.

X"dd/mm/yyyy"/"mm/dd/yyyy"/"yyyy/mm/dd"

[Time format]

Set the display format for the time.

X"12-hour"/"24-hour"

cI[Done]

Default Date format: MM/DD/YYYY Time format: 12-hour

Note

• yyyy=year, mm=month, dd=day in the display.

107

Sound/Screen/Light Settings

Select language

Switching the Display Language to English

You can switch the language of the displayed function names or messages between Japanese

and English.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Others"X"䊋䉟䊥䊮䉧䊦 (Bilingual)"

X"ᣣᧄ⺆ (Japanese)"/"English"

Default Japanese

Note

• When set to English, "Select language" is displayed as "䊋䉟䊥䊮䉧䊦 (Bilingual)"

• The settings of this function are recorded on the UIM. If another UIM is inserted into the phone, the setting

on a another UIM has priority.

109

Security Settings

Password

Passwords ......................................................................................................................... 110

Changing Passwords............................................................................New Passwords 111

Setting the UIM PIN ........................................................................................... PIN code 112

Unlocking a Locked UIM................................................................................................... 112

Restricting the Handset Operations

Lock Functions.................................................................................................................. 113

Locking the Handset to Prevent Use by Others............................................... Lock all 113

Stopping Incoming/Outgoing Calls ................................................................................. 114

Disabling Phonebook or Datebook Viewing.....................................Data access lock 115

Preventing Sidekey Operations .............................................................Keypad unlock 116

Restricting a Call/Mail/Data Transfer

Setting Redial/Received Call Log Display .............................. Display Call/Mail Logs 117

Displaying Secret Data .............................................................................. Secret mode 117

Rejecting Calls from a Specific Number ................................................ Reject on List 118

Rejecting All Incoming Calls..................................................................Reject all calls 119

Actions When Receiving Calls from Unknown Callers ................. Anonymous caller 119

Muting Ring Tones for Unknown Callers ...................................... Set mute ring(sec.) 121

Rejecting Calls from Unknown Caller ................................................ Reject unknown 121

Other "Security Settings"

Other "Security Settings"................................................................................................. 122

110

Security Settings

Passwords

Some functions of the FOMA handset require a password. In addition to the Security Code,

there are the network security code and the i-mode Password. These passwords help you

utilize your handset.

Security Code

The Security Code is a 4-8 digit number. The Security Code is set to "0000" by default and ,

however, you can change the code by yourself.→P111

If the Security Code entry screen opens, enter the 4䌾8 digit Security Code and

press C[OK].

• The Security Code is marked as "䋪" on the screen. The actual numbers entered will not be

displayed.

Network Security Code

The Network Security Code is a 4-digit number that is required to access procedures and to

use network services and is set to the number you selected at subscription. You can change

the code by yourself. If you have "DoCoMo ID/Password" for "My DoCoMo", the

comprehensive support site for PCs, you can change the network security code by visiting the

web site from your PC. You can change the Network Security Code by yourself by accessing

"ฦ⒳ᚻ⛯䈐 (Procedures)" on DoCoMo e-site using i-mode.

• For information on accessing "My DoCoMo" and the "DoCoMo e-site", see the back of this manual.

i-mode Password

Add/remove from my menu, message service, i-mode service fees/cancellation require the

4-digit "i-mode password" to change.

(Some other information service providers may set passwords for their sites)

i-mode password is originally set to "0000", but you can change it at any time. Access "iMenu"

X"ENGLISH" X"Options" X"Change i-mode Password" if you are using i-mode.

Warning about Passwords

• Avoid setting a password using your birthday, a part of your phone number, your address or room number,

1111 or 1234, that can be easily guessed by others. Be sure to write down the set passwords and store

them in a separate location.

• Do not reveal your passwords to others. DoCoMo is not responsible for damage caused by misuse of your

security codes by others.

• DoCoMo will never ask you for your passwords.

• If you forget your passwords, you need to bring an ID (driver's license, etc.), the handset and the UIM to a

service counter such as DoCoMo shop. For details, contact a "DoCoMo Information Center" on the back of

this manual.

Security Code

entry screen

111

Security Settings

UIM PIN/UIM PIN2

You can assign 2 PIN numbers to the UIM, UIM PIN and UIM PIN2. These codes are set to

"0000" by default, however, you can change them by yourself.→P112

The UIM PIN is a 4- to 8-digit number (code) required to identify the user every time the UIM is

inserted into the handset or the handset power is turned on in order to prevent unauthorized

use. The UIM PIN entry is required to make or receive calls, and operate the handset. The UIM

PIN2 is a 4- to 8-digit number used to reset outgoing call charges, incoming call charges (if

any) and the total of both, to reset total call charges, to set the maximum limit for call charges,

to set the currency, or to use or apply for User certificates.

If the UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 entry screen opens, enter the 4- to 8-digit UIM PIN/

UIM PIN2 and press C[OK].

• The entered UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 is marked as "䋪" on the screen. The numbers actually

entered will not be displayed.

• Use the UIM PIN and UIM PIN2 you set previously if you purchase a new handset but keep

the same UIM.

PIN Unlock Code

The PIN Unlock Code is an 8-digit number to unlock the UIM PIN or UIM PIN2.→P112

You cannot change it.

• If you fail to enter the correct Pin Unlock code 10 times, the UIM PIN1PIN2 functions will be completely locked.

New Passwords

Changing Passwords

The security code can be changed.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"Change Security

code"

bEnter the current security code

Change Security code screen opens.

cEnter a new security code

dEnter the new security code again.

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Security code (4 digits): 0000

UIM PIN

entry screen

(Example: UIM

PIN)

ᣂⷙ PIN1 䋯PIN2 䉮䊷䊄䈱⸳ቯ

10 ࿁ㅪ⛯

౉ജ䊚䉴

౉ജ OK

䈱႐ว

3࿁ㅪ⛯

౉ജ䊚䉴 PIN 䊨䉾䉪 ⸃㒰䉮䊷䊄

䈱౉ജ

䊄䉮䊝䉲䊢䉾䊒⓹ญ䈮䈍໧䈇ว䉒

䈞䈒䈣䈘䈇䇯

PIN1 䉮䊷䊄

䈱౉ജ

PIN2 䉮䊷䊄

䈱౉ജ

112

Security Settings

PIN code

Setting the UIM PIN

PIN1 code request

Setting to Enter UIM PIN when the Handset is Turned On

Sets the FOMA Handset so it displays UIM PIN 1 entry screen and can't be used without

entering the UIM PIN at startup.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"PIN code"XEnter

security codeX"PIN1 code request"X"ON"/"OFF"XEnter PIN1

code

Making emergency calls (to 110, 119 or 118) when the PIN1 entry screen is open.

You can make emergency calls (to 110, 118 or 119) even when the PIN1 entry screen is open.

XI[Emergency] Xmove the cursor to an emergency number XC[OK]/A

UIM PIN/UIM PIN2Change code

Changing UIM PIN/UIM PIN2

• Set "PIN1 code request" to "ON" before changing the UIM PIN.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"PIN code"XEnter

Security code

b"Change PIN1 code"/"Change PIN2 code"XEnter Current UIM

PIN/UIM PIN2

The new UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 entry screen opens.

cEnter the new UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 (4- to 8-digit)

The new UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 reentry screen opens.

dReenter the UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 entered in Step 3

Unlocking a Locked UIM

If you enter an incorrect UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 three times in a row and the PIN lock screen opens,

enter the PIN unblock code to cancel the lock.

• The PIN Unlock code is written on the FOMA subscription application form (customer's copy).

• You need to set new UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 after unlocking UIM PIN.

䈗ᄾ⚂ᤨ UIMPIN: 0000 UIMPIN2: 0000

113

Security Settings

aPIN Lock screenXEnter PIN Unlock code (8 digits)

The new UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 entry screen opens.

bEnter the new UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 (4- to 8-digit)

The reentry screen for confirmation screen opens.

cReenter the UIM PIN/UIM PIN2 entered in Step 2

Lock Functions

Lock all

Locking the Handset to Prevent Use by Others

Locks the handset to prevent from using it.

• When Lock all is activated, the only operations you can perform are power On/Off, emergency calls, and cancel

Lock all.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"Lock"X"Lock all"

XEnter Security codeX"Yes"/"No"

Calling Emergency Numbers (110, 119, and 118) During Lock all

Emergency numbers (110, 119, and 118) can be called during Lock all.

XI[Emergency]XMove the cursor to the emergency number XC[OK]/A.

To Cancel Lock all

Enter the security code. If an incorrect security code is entered 5 times, the phone automatically shuts off.

Lock Function Description Reference

Lock all Lock the handset to prevent unauthorized use. P113

Call/Mail lock To prevent unauthorized use of the FOMA handset, you can disable

making calls, entering an address with dial keys, answering calls, or

displaying mail.

P114

Self mode You can disable all functions requiring communications such as making/

receiving calls, using i-mode, or sending/receiving mail. P115

Data access lock You can specify specific functions to lock. P115

Keypad unlock You can lock the Sidekeys to prevent improper operations if the keys are

pressed accidentally when the closed FOMA handset is kept in a bag. P116

Display Call/mail logs You can hide Redial, Received calls, Sent mail logs, and Received mail

logs. P117

Secret mode You can keep someone from displaying the Phonebook entries, schedule,

To Do tasks set as secret data. P117

114

Security Settings

Stopping Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Call/Mail lock

Disabling Outgoing or Incoming Communications

Disable making calls, entering an address with dial keys, answering calls, or displaying mail.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"Lock"

X"Call/Mail Lock"XEnter Security code

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Call/Mail Lock set]

Sets whether to activate the Call/Mail Lock. When setting to "On", select from the items follow.

X"On"/"Off"

[Dialing call lock]

Disable the following operations.

• Making calls entering numbers with dial keys

• Making calls using Received calls or mail history

• Making calls to a phone number in the redial list (while allowing calls to a number saved in the phonebook or

an emergency number such as "110", "119", or "118")

• Saving, editing, or deleting a phonebook entry (including exchanging data via infrared communication, or

copying/moving to the microSD memory card)

XCheck off/Uncheck

[Send mail lock]

Disable the following operations.

• Entering a mail address with dial keys

• Sending mail to an address in the redial or received call log (while allowing mail to an address saved in the

Phonebook)

• Performing data communications connecting to a PC, etc.

• Saving, editing, or deleting a phonebook entry (including exchanging data via infrared communication, or

copying/moving to the microSD memory card)

XCheck off/Uncheck

[Incoming call lock]

While the dialing call lock is activated, a missed call icon will not be displayed and the Received call log

cannot be viewed

XCheck off/Uncheck

[Received mail display lock]

While the dialing call lock is activated, an icon will indicate that incoming mail will not be displayed, and

mail in the FOMA handset and received mail log can not be viewed. Disables display of send or received

mails or Message R/F.

XCheck off/Uncheck

cI[Done]

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Lock Settings: Off

Call/Mail Lock

screen

115

Security Settings

Self mode

Stopping All Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Disables all network functions, such as phone, i-mode and mail. Infrared communication is also

impossible.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Call/VT/Dialing"X"Self mode"X

"On"/"Off"

When Self Mode is "On", the Stand-by display displays a .

Data access lock

Disabling Phonebook or Datebook Viewing

You can lock specified functions and require the security code to use the handset, or restrict

the use of the handset.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"Lock"

X"Data access lock"XEnter security code

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Data access Lock set]

Set whether to activate the "Data access lock". When setting to "On", select from the items follow.

While the dialing call lock is activated, an icon will indicate that incoming mail will not be displayed, and

mail in the FOMA handset and received mail log can not be viewed.

X"On"/"Off"

[Phonebook]

The Phonebook can not be used until the Security code is entered.

• In the Redial list or logs, the phone number or mail address sent by the caller/sender will be displayed instead

of the name saved in the Phonebook.

• Receiving Phonebook entries using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

XCheck off/Uncheck

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Off

Note

• Self mode is deactivated if you try to call an emergency number.

• If Self Mode is active, incoming callers will hear a message indicating that the phone is off.

• Voice mail service and call forwarding service still works in Self Mode.

• All Mails, Message R/F and SMS received while in Self Mode are stored at the i-mode center and SMS

center (respectively). When receiving, after shutting off self mode, check new message/SMS.

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Lock Settings: Off

Data access

lock set

Continue on the next page

116

Security Settings

[Mail]

The mail function can not be used until the Security code is entered.

• Receiving mail using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

• SMS send while this function is activated is not received automatically. Perform "Check new SMS"

XCheck off/Uncheck

[Data box]

The mail function can not be used until the Security code is entered.

• Receiving data such as images or melodies to be saved in the Data box using infrared communication

becomes unavailable.

XCheck off/Uncheck

[Record message]

The Record message can not be used until the Security code is entered.

• If the Record message is set to "On" and locked, $4 record msg.eps$ is not displayed on the Stand-by screen

even when a message is recorded.

XCheck off/Uncheck

[Schedule]

The schedule function can not be used until the Security code is entered.

• An alarm set for a Schedule event will not sound.

• Receiving schedule events using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

XCheck off/Uncheck

[i-mode]

The i-mode can not be used until the Security code is entered.

• i-mode connections such as "Web to" other than from the i-mode menu screen become unavailable.

• i-Channel tickers will not be displayed.

• Updating software or pattern data for the scanning function becomes unavailable.

• Receiving Bookmarks using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

XCheck off/Uncheck

[i-appli]

The i-appi can not be used until the Security code is entered.

• Receiving i-appli data using infrared communication becomes unavailable.

XCheck off/Uncheck

cI[Done]

Keypad unlock

Preventing Sidekey Operations

The handset can be set to lock the Sidekey when it is closed.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"Keypad unlock"X

Perform the following operation

Slide up only 䋺Sidekeys are not available with the FOMA handset closed.

Allow manual unlock 䋺Press F/E 2times while the FOMA handset is closed, the key lock is temporarily

disabled.

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Allow manual unlock

Note

• If the phone is closed at Photo-mode/Movie-mode, Keypad unlock is not set.

117

Security Settings

Display Call/Mail Logs

Setting Redial/Received Call Log Display

Disables display of redial, received call, sent mail, and received mail logs.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X

"Display Call/Mail logs"XEnter Security code

bPerform the following operation

The items set to "On" will not be displayed.

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Redial logs]

Set whether to display the redial function.

X"On"/"Off"

[Missed call logs]

Set whether to display the Received call logs.

X"On"/"Off"

[Sent mail logs]

Set whether to display the sent mail logs.

X"On"/"Off"

[Received mail logs]

Set whether to display the received mail logs.

X"On"/"Off"

cI[Done]

Secret mode

Displaying Secret Data

You can set whether or not to view a secret Phonebook/schedule.

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Lock/Security"X"Secret mode"X

Enter security codeXSelect Secret mode settings

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ (All) ON

Note

• If "Received call logs" is set to "Off", Record message cannot be played back.

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Off

Display Call/

Mail logs

Setting screen

118

Security Settings

Off 䋺Display only general data.

On 䋺Display secret and general data.

Secret only mode 䋺Secret only mode Display only secret data.

Reject on List

Rejecting Calls from a Specific Number

You can reject calls from the specific parties stored in a list.

• This function is available only when the caller sends Caller ID.

• You should set the Caller ID request concurrently.

Saving a Phone Number to Reject

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Send/VT/Dialing"X

"Incoming call"X"Accept/Reject call"XEnter security

codeX"Accept/Reject set"XMove to the cursor to

"Reject on list"XI[List]XI[Add]

bPerform the following operation

[Reject types]

Selects action for rejected call.

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Reject number]

Sets phone number for call rejection.

•M[Search] : Searches and sets number from Phonebook. The name saved in the Phonebook is

displayed on the list.

•C[Select] : Enter and set phone number. The entered phone number is displayed in the list.

cI[Done]

To delete a saved phone number

Select the number to delete from the Reject on list screenXM[Menu]X"Delete"/"Delete all"X"Yes"

Note

• appears at the top of the screen when Secret mode is activated.

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Accept

Silent

Disconnect all

䋺Receive a call without the Ring tone. Displays a on the list.

䋺You do not receive the call. Displays a on the list.

Reject on List

screen

Add new

119

Security Settings

To edit a saved phone number

Select a phone number to edit on the Reject on list screen XM [Menu] X Select "Edit"

• If the phone number has already been saved, you can also save the phone number by performing from the Reject

on list screen XM[Menu] X "Add new".

Setting the Reject on List

aM[Menu]X(Settings)X"Send/VT/Dialing"X"Incoming call"

X"Accept/Reject call"XEnter security codeX"Accept/Reject set"

X"Reject on list"

䂓To Release

Select "Accept" on "Accept/Reject call" screen.

Reject all calls

Rejecting All Incoming Calls

You can mute all incoming calls and disconnect without incoming call actions.

[Menu]

X(Settings)X"Send/VT/Dialing"X"Incoming call"

X"Accept/Reject call"XEnter security codeX"Accept/Reject set"

X"Reject all calls"X"Silent"/Disconnect call"

Silent 䋺Receives all calls with the ring tones silent.

Disconnect all䋺 Does not perform the incoming call actions for all incoming calls.

䂓To Release

Select "Accept" on "Accept/Reject call" screen.

Anonymous caller

Actions When Receiving Calls from Unknown

Callers

You can set whether to accept or reject calls without Caller ID depending on the reason for no

Caller ID.

Note

• When the Reject call list is activated,and receive a call from the party registered in the Reject call list,

appears on the Stand-by display and Received call log is recorded as a Missed call. The other party hears

a busy signal.

• i-mode mails or SMS are received regardless of rejection settings.

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Accept

Note

• When you have a call from the party registered in the Reject call list, appears on the Stand-by display

and Received call log is recorded as a Missed call. The other party hears a busy signal.

• i-mode mails or SMS are received regardless of rejection settings.

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Anonymous Caller: Disabled Public Phone: Disabled Not Support: Disabled

Continue on the next page

120

Security Settings

[Menu]

X(Settings)X

"Call/VT/

Dialing"X

"Incoming call "X"Anonymous caller"XEnter security

code

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[User unset]

Set options for calls made without the Caller ID because the caller chose not to send Caller ID.

[Pay phone]

Set an option for calls made from Payphone.

[Not support]

Set an option for calls made from overseas or from a fixed line phone via forwarding services, from which

Caller ID cannot be sent. (Caller ID may be sent depending on the carrier.)

cI[Done]

Disable

Call rejection

Silent alert

Terminal setting

䋺Cancel the setting.

䋺Reject a call.

䋺Recei ve the call without playing Ring tone. You can select an image saved in "My

picture" in the "Data box" for the Incoming call screen.→P194

XDXSelect field X "My picture" /"i-motion" X Select the Image

䋺You can select a file from the "Data box" for the Incoming call screen or the ring tone.

Incoming call screen : XDX Select field X "My picture"/"i-motion" X Select an image

Ring tone : XDX Select field X "Music"/"i-motion"/"Melody" X Select a ring tone

Disable

Call rejection

Silent alert

Terminal setting

䋺Cancel the setting.

䋺Reject a call.

䋺Receive the call without playing Ring tone. You can select an image saved in "My

picture" in the "Data box" for the Incoming call screen.→P194

XDX Select field X "My picture"/"i-motion" X Select an image

䋺You can select a file from the "Data box" for the Incoming call screen or the ring tone.

Incoming call screen : XDX Select field X "My picture"/"i-motion" X Select an image

Ring tone : XDX Select field X "Music"/"i-motion"/"Melody" X Select a ring tone

Disable

Call rejection

Silent alert

Terminal setting

䋺Cancel the setting.

䋺Reject a call.

䋺Receive the call without playing Ring tone. You can select an image saved in "My

picture" in the "Data box" for the Incoming call screen.→P194

XDX Select field X "My picture"/"i-motion" X Select an image

䋺You can select a file from the "Data box" for the Incoming call screen or the ring

tone.

Incoming call screen : XDX Select field X "My picture"/"i-motion" X Select an image

Ring tone : XDX Select field X "Music"/"i-motion"/"Melody" X Select a ring tone

Note

• When User unset is activated, if a call without caller ID set to "Reject unknown" arrives, the call will not be

indicated, is displayed on the Stand-by screen, and the call is recorded in Received call log as a missed

call. Calls are rejected even when Voice mail or Call forwarding service is activated. However, if Ringing

Time is set to 0 second or the handset is out of service area or turned off, each network service starts.

• i-mode mails or SMS are received regardless of rejection settings.

<[User unset]>

• If the Caller ID Request service is activated, it takes precedence over the settings of "Anonymous caller".

the caller hears a message requesting the Caller ID.

Anonymous

caller

121

Security Settings

Set mute ring(sec.)

Muting Ring Tones for Unknown Callers

You can set the handset not to ring when a call arrives from other parties not saved in Contacts

or without Caller ID. This prevents nuisance calls such as "1 ring calls" that disconnect after a

short ringing time.

[Menu]

X(Settings)X"Sounds&Vibration"X"Set mute ring

time"

bPerform the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Set mute ring(sec.)]

Sets the time before the ringer is played when a call is received. When setting to "On", select from the

items follow.

X"Off"/"On"

[Mute seconds ]

Set an interval from when a call arrives until the ring action starts between 0 and 99 seconds.

Xto enter the time

[Mute time]

Set whether to show the Received call logs for the call that was terminated within the time specified in

"Mute seconds".

X"Show"/"Do not show"

cI[Done]

Reject unknown

Rejecting Calls from Unknown Caller

You can set to reject calls from other parties not saved in Contacts.

• This function is available only when the caller sends Caller ID.

• It is recommended that you set the Caller ID request and "Anonymous caller" concurrently.

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Off

Note

• When a relevant caller calls while this function is activated, incoming call actions, such as sounding the Ring

tone, will not be taken for the set time; however, the Incoming call screen is shown.

• This option works, even when Secret Mode is set enabled and there is a call from a party whose Phonebook

entry is set as secret.

• If the Ring Delay is set longer than the response time of the Voice mail/Call forwarding services, the Record

Message starts without the ring action.

• If the Ring Delay is set longer than the response time of "Record message", the Record Message starts

without the ring action.

• You cannot change the "Mute seconds" setting when "Reject unknown" is set to "On".

䈗 ᄾ⚂ᤨ Off

122

Security Settings

[Menu]

X(Settings)X

"Call/VT/Dialing"

"Incoming call"

"Accept/Reject call"

Enter security code

"Reject unknown"

"On"/"Off"

Other "Security Settings"

In addition to the security functions described in this chapter, the following functions and

services are available.

Note

• The handset does not start incoming call actions for a rejected incoming call, but the call is recorded in

Received call logs. The other party hears a busy signal.

• Calls are rejected even when Voice mail or Call forwarding service is activated. However, if Ringing Time is

set to 0 second, each network service starts.

• i-mode mails or SMS are received regardless of rejection settings.

Purpose Function Names/

Service Names Reference

To upload or check safety messages through i-mode in case of

disaster. "i-mode Disaster Message

Board Service" service For further

details,

please see

"Mobile

Phone User's

Guide

(i-mode

<FOMA>

Chapter)".

To Change Email address Change Mail Address

View an Email address if you forget it Confirm Mail Address

To receive/reject mail from a specified domain Spam Mail Prevention

(Reject/Receive Mail

Settings)

To receive/reject Email via i-mode only

To receive/reject mail from a specified address

Want to reject SMS Spam Mail Prevention

(SMS Rejection Settings)

Do not receive mail containing an URL Spam Mail Prevention

(Reject mail with URL)

To reject incoming i-mode mail in excess of 200 a day from an

i-mode phone Restrict i-mode Spam

To reject unsolicited mail Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail

To check the Email setting status Confirm Settings

To restrict incoming Email size Limit Mail Size

To temporarily disable mail functions Suspend Mail

To select and download Email Receive option P167

To register and reject calls from a nuisance caller Nuisance Call Blocking

service P259

To ask a caller to show Caller ID Caller ID Request P260

To update software on the handset when necessary Software Update P325

To protect the handset from harmful data Scanning Function P327

123

Camera

Before Using the Camera ................................................................................................. 124

Capturing Still Images ..................................................................................Photo-Mode 129

Capturing Movies ..........................................................................................Movie-Mode 127

Changing the Capture Settings ....................................................................................... 132

Changing the Camera Settings................................................................ Camera Setup 133

Using Bar code Reader........................................................................ Barc code reader 134

124

Camera

Before Using the Camera

Notes for Capturing Images

• The camera employs high precision technology, but some pixels or lines may seem brighter or darker than

others. Also, when capturing in places with insufficient lighting, noise, seen as white lines, increases. This is

normal.

• Clean the lens with a soft cloth before capturing. If the lens is stained with fingerprints or oil, the captured image

may appear out of focus or blurred.

• Do not leave the handset in a warm place or under a direct sunlight for a long period. The image or video to

capture may deteriorate.

• If you capture under a fluorescent light, mercury lamp or sodium lamp flickering at high speed, flickering such

as stripes may appear. The color tone of still images or movies may vary depending on the capturing timing.

• Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight for a long period and do not capture at the sun or bright lamp directly.

The image may become discolored or the camera may fail.

• Do not cover the lens with your fingers, hair or the handset lanyard when capturing.

• Capturing a fast moving object may result in an image slightly distorted from the image displayed on the screen

at the time of capturing, or the image may be blurred.

• When the battery level is low, you may not be able to save captured still images or movies. Check the battery

level before capturing.

• Captured still images or movies may differ from the actual subjects in brightness or color tone.

•

Even in Manner mode, the shutter tone sounds at a fixed volume.

The shutter tone sounds from the Speaker

even when a Flat-plug earphone/microphone with switch (optional) is connected to the FOMA handset.

Copyrights and Portrait Rights

You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents such as text, images, music, or

software downloaded from web sites on the Internet, or images captured by the cameras of

this product without permission from the copyright except for when the copy or quote is for

personal use that is allowed by the Copyright Law. Note that it may be prohibited to capture or

record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use. Refrain from taking portraits of

other persons and uploading such portraits on websites without consent, as this violates

portrait rights.

Please be considerate of other people's privacy when capturing and sending pictures using

camera-equipped mobile phones.

125

Camera

Using the Camera

You can select the Inner or Outer camera, depending on the situation. Switching Cameras

→P133

䂓Outer camera

This is useful for taking pictures of scenery or other

people. The screen output is similar to what you

see (normal image). AF adjusts the focus of the

Outer camera. →P129

䂓Inner camera

Useful for taking pictures of yourself. The screen

shows the true (normal) image. The image can

saved to appear as a mirror (vertically flipped)

image or as normal image. →P129

Capturing Screen Components

The meanings of marks (icons and others) on the still image photography/video capture screen are as

follows:

Outer Camera

䊐䉤䊃䊤䉟䊃

Inner Camera

Movie capture

screen

Still image

photography

cd b

acd h

Camera-mode→P129, P131

Photo-mode

Movie-mode

Barcode Reader

bImage size→P129, P131

䇭UXGA (1200x1600)

䇭SXGA (960x1280)

䇭VGA (640䌸480)

䇭CIF (352䌸288)

䇭Stand-by display

(240 x 320)

䇭QCIF (176䌸144)

䇭Sub-QCIF

(128䌸96)

䇭Phonebook

(120䌸160)

䇭Menu Icon (88 x 70)

Quality→P129, P131

Super fine

Fine

Standard

dWhite balance→P129, P131

Daylight

Cloudy

Incandescent

Fluorescent

eNight mode→P129, P131

fDelay timer→P129

3sec

5sec

10sec

gContinuous mode→P129

Auto

Manual

Size restriction→P131

2MB

500KB

iType→P131

Sound+Video

Movie only

Sound only

jFocus Frame →P129

kControl Key

Available keys for navigation

lElapsed capturing time/

Maximum capturing time

Elapsed capturing time/

Maximum capturing time

mCapturing progress bar

Displays the elapsed

capturing time with a bar.

126

Camera

Save Format of Still Images or Movies

Still Image File Movie File

File Format JPEG MP4 (Mobile MP4)

Resolution Outer camera UXGA (1200x1600)

SXGA (960x1280)

VGA (640x480)

CIF (352x288)

Stand-by display (240 x 320)

QCIF (176x144)

Sub QCIF (128x96)

Phonebook (120x160)

Menu Icon (88 x 70)

SQCIF (128x96)

QCIF (176x144)

Inner camera VGA (640x480)

CIF (352x288)

Stand-by display (240 x 320)

QCIF (176x144)

Sub QCIF (128x96)

Phonebook (120x160)

Menu Icon (88 x 70)

Encoding Format 䋭Video: MPEG-4

Voice: AMR

File Extension .jpg .3gp

File Name The year, month, date, hour and minute of the time of capture will be added automatically.

Example: If taken at: 2007/10/1 10:10

Photo Name: "P2007_1001_1010_0"

Movie-mode: "V2007_1001_1010_0"

Maximum File Size Approx. 2MB Approx. 58MB

127

Camera

Number of Savable Still Images as a Rough Guide

The number of still images that can be saved on this FOMA handset or the microSD memory

card varies depending on the resolution, image quality, capturing conditions, and capture

objects.

Location ResolutionQuality UXGA

(1200x1600) SXGA

(960X1280) VGA

(640X480) CIF

(352X288) Wallpaper

(240X320)

L705i

(Handset) Superfine Approx.250 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000

Fine Approx.280 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000

Standard Approx.400 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000

microSD

memory

card(64MB)

Superfine Approx.160 Approx.800 Approx.800 Approx.1700 Approx.2100

Fine Approx.180 Approx.1200 Approx.1200 Approx.2100 Approx.2600

Standard Approx.250 Approx.1400 Approx.1400 Approx.2600 Approx.3200

Location ResolutionQuality QCIF

(176x144) Sub-QCIF

(128X96) Phonebook

(120X160) Menu Icon

(88X70)

L705i

(Handset) Superfine Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000

Fine Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000

Standard Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000 Approx.1000

microSD

memory

card(64MB)

Superfine Approx.3200 Approx.1280

0Approx.3500 Approx.1800

Fine Approx.3500 Approx.2100

0Approx.4000 Approx.2500

Standard Approx.4000 Approx.2600

0Approx.4200 Approx.3200

Continue on the next page

128

Camera

Movie Capture Duration as a rough guide

The movie capturing duration varies depending on the movie length, quality, capturing

conditions, and captured objects.

䂓Continuous Recording Time for files on the L705i(Phone)/micro SD memory card (except*)

㶎䋺 micro SD memory card can save approx.50 minutes.

䂓Total Recording Time: Common Restriction on each File

Capture

Type

Size restriction No restriction 2MB 500KBB

Resolution

Quality QCIF

(176x144) Sub-QCIF

(128X96) QCIF

(176x144) Sub-QCIF

(128X96) QCIF

(176x144) Sub-QCIF

(128X96)

Audio and

Graphics Superfine Approx.60

minutes* Approx.60

minutes Approx.117

seconds Approx.220

seconds Approx.29

seconds Approx.55

seconds

Fine Approx.60

minutes Approx.60

minutes Approx.153

seconds Approx.285

seconds Approx.38

seconds Approx.71

seconds

Standard Approx.60

minutes Approx.60

minutes Approx.222

seconds Approx.400

seconds Approx.55

seconds Approx.100

seconds

Graphics

only Superfine Approx.60

minutes Approx.60

minutes Approx.153

seconds Approx.285

seconds Approx.38

seconds Approx.71

seconds

Fine Approx.60

minutes Approx.60

minutes Approx.200

seconds Approx.400

seconds Approx.50

seconds Approx.100

seconds

Standard Approx.60

minutes Approx.60

minutes Approx.285

seconds Approx.500

seconds Approx.71

seconds Approx.125

seconds

Audio only Approx.60 minutes Approx.19 minutes Approx.284 seconds

Location Capture Type Resolution

Quality QCIF

Åi176 X 144Åj Sub-QCIF

Åi128X96Åj

L705i(Handset) Audio and Graphics Superfine Approx.80 minutes Approx.150 minutes

Fine Approx.110 minutes Approx.190 minutes

Standard Approx.150 minutes Approx.260 minutes

Graphics only Superfine Approx.90 minutes Approx.180 minutes

Fine Approx.120 minutes Approx.240 minutes

Standard Approx.180 minutes Approx.340 minutes

Audio only 䋼Confirming specs䋾

microSD memory

card(64MB) Audio and Graphics Superfine Approx.50 minutes Approx.100 minutes

Fine Approx.70 minutes Approx.130 minutes

Standard Approx.100 minutes Approx.160 minutes

Graphics only Superfine Approx.63 minutes Approx.122 minutes

Fine Approx.84 minutes Approx.160 minutes

Standard Approx.123 minutes Approx.230 minutes

Audio only 䋼Confirming specs䋾

129

Camera

Photo-Mode

Capturing Still Images

• Captured still images are stored in the "Camera"

folder under "My Picture" in "Data box" on the

handset. To change the saving destination to the

microSD memory card, access "Saving option"

(P133).

aM[Menu] X(Camera) X"Photo-

mode".

䂓Key operation on still image photography screen

bPoint the camera to the subject XC

[Take]䋯G

A still image is captured

A still image is captured and

automatically saved in the

destination specified in "Auto

saving" (P133).

The Confirm save screen

opens and the Still image

capture screen returns.

• You can use AF while

capturing images.→P129

• When using the inner

camera, images on the

capture screen are

displayed as mirror images, however, images

will be saved as normal images. To save the

image as a mirror image, set "Auto saving" to

"Off".

• Press I to compose an i-mode mail attached

with the capture still image file.

Using AF

The subject in the center of the screen is

automatically focused on. Auto focusing starts

when you press A[AF] on the still image

photography screen, then the Auto focus function

starts and the focus frame turns red when focused

When "Saving option" (P133) is set to Off

After an image is captured, the Captured image

confirmation screen opens, and you can select

whether to save the image.

To save the image

Press C [Save] to open the Specify saving

destination screen. Select a destination folder X

C [OK] to open the Confirm save screen. Press

C [OK] to save the captured image and the Still

image capture screen returns.

To not save the image

Press I [Cancel].

• Even after you pressed C [Save], you can

cancel saving by pressing Q

䋯

I [Cancel]

from the Specify saving destination screen or

pressing Q on the Confirm save screen.

For images captured with "Continuous mode"

You can select, delete, or display images to save

on the Captured image confirmation screen.

• To save selected images, select images to save

and press C [Save] or M [Menu] X "Save

selected". The Specify saving destination

screen opens.

• To save all captured images, press M [Menu]

X "Save all". The Specify saving destination

screen opens.

• To delete selected images, select images to

delete and press M [Menu] X "Delete".

• To display only the selected images, press I

[View].

Saving the Mirror Image of the Picture Taken by

the Inner camera

If "Saving option" (P130) is set to "Off", the

captured image can be saved as a mirror image

(flipped vertically).

•XOn the Captured image confirm screen,

M[Menu] X "Save mirror image" Xselect a

folder XC[OK]

• You can confirm the image as a normal image

when press M [Menu] select "View normal

image".

Still Image Photography Screen sub menu

Key Description

C[Take]䋯GShutter

HZoom

JBrightness controls

F䋯ESelect Inner or Outer camera

M[Menu] Display sub menu

I䌛䌝List of Pictures in "Camera" folder in

"My Picture"

A[AF] Start AF

Q[Cancel] Exit Photo-mode

Still image

photography

Confirm save

(Example: Case

of Outer Camera)

Note

• Even when Manner mode is activated, the

shutter tone sounds when capturing.

Default

Select camera: Outer camera

Frame shot: OFF

Continuous mode: OFF

Night mode: OFF

Effect: None

White balance: Auto

Delay timer: None

Select size: Wallpaper(240x320)

Quality: Fine

130

Camera

aStill image photography screen(P129)

XM[Menu] XPerformsthe following

operations

[ Camera-mode]

Change photo modes

X"Photo-mode"/"Movie-mode"/"Bar code reader"

[ Switch camera]

Select Inner or Outer camera.

X"Inner camera"/"Outer camera"

[Frameshot]

Adds a frame to the subject when capturing an image.

[ Continuous mode]

Captures continuous (sequential) images when the

shutter is pressed.

Captures up to 4 continuous images of "CIF(352 x

288)" pixels, or up to 6 images of less than "CIF(352 x

288)" pixels.

[Nightmode]

Activate when using in dark places.

X"OFF"/"ON"

[ Effect]

Add an effect to the pictures to be taken.

X"None"/"Black & White"/"Sepia"/"Negative"

[ White balance]

Sets hue/tint for the image. When set according to the

conditions, a naturally colored image is produced.

X"Auto"/"Daylight"/"Cloudy"/"Incandescent"/

"Fluorescent"

[ Delay timer]

Set the number of seconds from the time the shutter is

pressed until the picture is taken.

X"None"/"3sec"/"5sec"/"10sec"

[ Select size]

Sets the image size.

XSelect image size→P126

[ Quality]

Sets still images save settings.

X"Super fine"/"Fine"/"Normal"

Still Image Capture Completion Screen sub

aConfirm Save screen (P129) X

M[Menu] XPerforms the following

operations

[New picture]

Return to the still image photography screen.

[Compose mail]

Attach the picture to a mail and send it.→P161

[Edit image]

Edit a still image.→P198

[Delete]

Cancel to save and delete a still image.

[Set as wallpaper]

Set a captured image as the Stand-by display's

wallpaper.

Movie-Mode

Capturing Movies

• Captured movies are stored in the "Camera" folder

under "i-motion" in "Data box" on the handset by

default. To change the saving destination to the

microSD memory card, access "Saving option"

(P133).

aM[Menu] X(Camera) X"Movie-

mode"

䂓Key operation on movie capture screen

OFF

Choose frame

䋺Does not attach a frame.

䋺Select a frame from "My picture".

OFF

Auto

Manual

䋺No continuous capturing.

䋺Takes continuous pictures by pressing the

shutter once.

䋺Takes continuous pictures by pressing the

shutter consecutively.

Note

• If the "Select size" is set to "UXGA(1200x1600)"

or "SXGA(960x1280)", the zoom feature cannot

be used.

• When "Continuous mode" is set, the picture size

is reduced to "CIF (352x288) ", if the "Select

size" is set to "CIF (352x288)".

• When "Continuous mode" is set, the "Delay

timer" is disabled.

• When "Continuous mode" is set to "Auto", the

pictures will be taken the following intervals.

Inner camera: About 0.7 seconds

Outer camera: About 0.2 seconds

• When "Continuous mode" is set to "Manual",

only press C[Take] to take a picture after

second shot. Not available to press G.

Key Description

C䋯GStart capturing/Resume

䋪

HZoom

䋪

JBrightness control

䋪

Movie capture

131

Camera

䋪1䋺Resumption is not available when "Type" is

"Sound only".

䋪2䋺Can be used while capturing a movie.

bPoint the camera to the subject XC䋯

Start capturing a movie.

•C: Pause/resume the capturing.

Capturing ends, and the

captured video automatically

will be saved in the

destination specified in "Auto

saving" (P133).

The Confirm save screen

opens and the Video capture

screen returns.

• Auto focus function is

availble when taking.

• When using the inner camera, images on the

capture screen are displayed as mirror images,

however, images will be saved as normal

images. To save the image as a mirror image,

set "Auto saving" to "Off".

• Press I [Mail] on the Confirm save screen to

create i-mode mail with the captured video

attached.

When "Saving option" (P133) is set to Off

After a video is captured, the Confirm save screen

opens, and you can select whether to save the

video.

To save the video

Press C [Save] to open the Specify saving

destination screen. Select a destination folder X

C [OK] to open the Confirm save screen. Press

C [OK] to save the captured video and the Video

capture screen returns.

To not save the video

Press I [Cancel].

• Even after you press C [Save], you can cancel

saving by pressing Q/I [Cancel] from the

Specify saving destination screen or pressing

Q on the Confirm save screen.

To save a still image captured with the inner

camera as a mirror image

If the "Saving option" (P133) is set to "Off", the

captured video can be saved as a mirror image

(flipped vertically).

XFrom the Confirm save screen, M[Menu]

X"Save mirror image" Xselect a folder X

C[OK]

• From the Confirm save screen, select M

[Menu] X "View normal image" to play the video

in a normal image.

Movie Capture Screen Sub Menu

aMovie capture screen(P130) XM

[Menu] XPerforms the following

operations

[ Camera-mode]

Change photo modes

X"Photo-mode"/"Movie-mode"/"Bar code reader"

[ Size restriction]

To limit the file size of captured movie.

X"No restriction"/"2Mbyte"/"500Kbyte"

[ Switch camera]

Select Inner or Outer camera.

X"Inner camera"/"Outer camera"

[Nightmode]

Activate when using in dark places.

X"OFF"/"ON"

[ Effect]

Add an effect to the pictures to be taken.

X"None"/"Black & White"/"Sepia"/"Negative"

[ White balance]

Sets hue/tint for the image. When set according to the

conditions, a naturally colored image is produced.

X"Auto"/"Daylight"/"Cloudy"/"Incandescent"/

"Fluorescent"

[ Select size]

Set the image size to take.

X"QCIF (176䌸144)"/"Sub-QCIF (128䌸96)"

[ Quality]

Sets the quality of the saved movie.

X"Super fine"/"Fine"/"Normal"

[Type]

Sets voice settings when taking videos.

X"Voice+Video"/"Movie only"/"Sound only"

F䋯ESelect Inner or Outer camera

M[Menu] Display sub menu

I䌛䌝

List of Pictures in "Camera" folder in

"i-motion"

Q[Cancel] Exit Movie-mode

Confirm save

Note

• Even when Manner mode is activated, the

shutter tone sounds when capturing starts and

ends.

• Video capturing will be terminated when it is

interrupted by a call. After the call is over, the

confirm save screen appears.

Default

Size restriction: No restriction

Select camera: Outer camera

Night mode: OFF

Effect: None

White balance: Auto

Select size: QCIF (176x144)

Quality: Super fine

Type: Sound + Video

Common mode: OFF

132

Camera

[ Common mode]

Sets maximum file size to 500KB.

X"OFF"/"ON"

Confirm Save Screen Sub Menu

aConfirm Save Screen(130) XM

[Menu] XPerforms the following

operations

[New movie]

Return to the movie capture screen.

[Compose mail]

Attach the video to an i-mode mail and send it.→P161

[Delete]

Cancel to save the video data and delete it.

[Set as wallpaper]

Set as the Stand-by display's wallpaper.

Changing the Capture

Settings

Sets the Camera functions according to the

conditions.

Using Zoom

Set the image zoom magnification.

Available setting of the image size are as follows:

䂓Outer Camera

䂓Inner Camera

aStill image screen (P129) / video

capture screen (P130) XHallows you

to set zoom.

Adjusting Brightness

Adjust the brightness (exposure) of the image. The

brightness can be set from -2

to +2.

Note

• When setting "Common mode" to "ON",

"Quality" is not available to set.

Default Still Image/Movie: 1X

Camera

Mode Size Zoom Max.

magnific

ation

Photo

Mode

UXGA

䋨1200㬍1600䋩

䋭䋭

SXGA

䋨960㬍1280䋩

䋭䋭

VGA

䋨640㬍480䋩

10 steps Approx.1

CIF

䋨352㬍288䋩

Approx.1

Wallpaper

䋨240㬍320䋩

Approx.2

QCIF

䋨176㬍144䋩

Approx.3

Photo

Mode

Sub-QCIF

䋨128㬍96䋩

10 steps Approx.3

Phonebook

䋨120㬍160䋩

Menu icon

䋨80㬍70䋩

Video

Mode QCIF

䋨176㬍144䋩

10 steps Approx.3

Sub-QCIF

䋨128㬍96䋩

Camera

Mode Size Zoom Max.

magnific

ation

Photo

Mode VGA

䋨640㬍480䋩

䋭䋭

CIF

䋨352㬍288䋩

10 steps Approx.1

Wallpaper

䋨240㬍320䋩

Approx.2

QCIF

䋨176㬍144䋩

Approx.3

Sub-QCIF

䋨128㬍96䋩

Phonebook

䋨120㬍160䋩

Menu icon

䋨80㬍70䋩

Video

Mode QCIF

䋨176㬍144䋩

10 steps Approx.3

Sub-QCIF

䋨128㬍96䋩

Default Still Image/Video: 0

Zoom Settings

(Ex.: Still image

photography

Screen)

Zoom

Magnification

133

Camera

aStill image screen (P129) / video

capture screen (P130) XJSelects

brightness (exposure) of the image

Selecting Inner or Outer Camera

You can select Inner or Outer camera according to

your capturing style.

aStill image screen (P129) / video

capture screen (P130) XF/E

You can switch Inner and Outer cameras each

time you press F/E.→P125

Setting the Delay Timer

Set the number of seconds from the time the shutter

is pressed until the capturing is performed.

• The Auto Timer is not available for video capturing.

aStillimage (P129)XM[Menu]X[Delay

timer]

b"None"/"3sec"/"5sec"/"10sec"

(number: second)

appears at the top of the

screen.

cC[Take]䋯G

Activate Delay timer. Takes a photo after the set

number of seconds automatically.

After pressing the shutter button, the photo light

flashes and the timer sound rings during the

picture will be taken.

Camera Setup

Changing the Camera

Settings

Saving option

Saving Option

Sets still image photography / video auto save.

aM[Menu] X(Camera) X"Camera

settings" X"Saving option"XPerform

the following operation

•C[List] : List of the items is displayed.

[Save]

Set where picture is saved.

X"Handset"/"microSD card"

[Auto saving]

Sets whether phone automatically saves picture/video.

X"ON"/"OFF"

[Save picture to]䋪

Set where picture is saved.

XSelect save location

[Save movie to]䋪

Set where movie is saved.

XSelect video save location

䋪䋺 "Save to" is set to "Handset" when "Saving

option" is set to "ON".

bI[Done]

Shutter Sound Settings

aM[Menu]X(Camera)X"Camera

settings"X"Shutter sound"XSelect

shutter tone

Select an item and listen to the sample sound.

Flicker Tuning

The flicker in screen under a fluorescent light, etc.

may be reduced depending on the setting.

Default Still Image/Movie: Outer camera

Display brightness

(Ex.: Still image

photography Screen)

Brightness

correction

Delay Timer

Capture Screen

Default

Save to: Handset

Auto saving: ON

Save picture to: My picture/Camera

Save movie to: i-motion/Camera

Default Shutter Tone 1

Default Auto

134

Camera

aM[Menu] X(Camera) X"Camera

settings" X"Flicker tuning" XSelect

the tuning method

Auto

䋺

Controls the flicker automatically.

50Hz

䋺

Set where the frequency of the power is

50Hz.

60Hz

䋺

Set where the frequency of the power is

60Hz.

Barc code reader

Using Bar code Reader

You can scan information embedded in a Japan

Article Number code or QR code using the handset

camera. You can create i-mode mail or connect to

the Internet using the scanned information.You can

also save or play the scanned information, image or

melody.

• UP to 5 pieces of scanned information can be saved.

• Scan the code when the entire code is displayed on

the screen.

• Hold the camera parallel to the code.

䂓Japan Article Number code

The Japan Article Number code is a barcode

representing numbers using vertical bars in

different thickness and spaces. 8-digit (JAN8) or

13-digit (JAN13) barcode can be scanned.

•The scanned result of the following Japan Article

Number code is "4942857123456".

䂓QR codes

The QR code is one of the 2 dimensional codes

that expresses text including Kanji, Kana or

Pictograph (E-Moji) in the vertical and horizontal

patterns. Some QR codes have an image or

melody embedded, and there are split QR codes

where multiple images contain 1 larger piece of

information.

•The scanned result of the following QR code is

"ᩣᑼળ␠NTT䊄䉮䊝

Scanning Codes

aM[Menu]X(Camera)X"Bar code

reader"

䂓Key operations on the Scan screen.

䋪䋺 Press C[Scan] to operate only on the screen

after adjusting AF.

bFocus a camera on the code to scan

XC[Scan]

After the auto focusing, scan the code. When

scanning completes, a tone sounds and the

scanned data is displayed (Scan data screen).

• When the bar code reader is activated, it starts

scanning automatically.When focused, scan the

code automatically without pressingC[Scan].

• When "Keypad sound" is set to "Mute", or

"Manner mode" is activated, the beep does not

sound.

cDepending on the type of scanned

data, performs the following operations

• Depending on the scanned data, the display or

operation may differ.

• Always save the scanned data if you want to

use it later.

• Up to 16 divided QR codes can be continuously

scanned and combined.→135

䂓For phone numbers

Select the displayed phone number to open

the Phone number entry screen with the

scanned phone number already entered.

If "Add to Phonebook" is displayed, select the

phone number to save to the Phonebook.

Key Description

C[Scan] Start AF

M[Menu] Change the photo mode to

Photo-mode/Movie-mode/Bar

code reader

I[List] List the saved scanned data

A[Retry]䋪Readjust the AF.

Q[Cancel] Exit the Bar code reader

Scan Screen

135

Camera

䂓For mail addresses

Select the displayed mail address to create i-

mode mail with the scanned mail address or

subject already entered.

If "Add to Phonebook" is displayed, select the

address to save to the Phonebook.

䂓For URLs

Select a displayed URL to access the URL.

If "Add to bookmark" is displayed, select the

URL to save as a Bookmark.

䂓For text

The scanned characters are displayed.

䂓For images

The scanned image is displayed.

䂓For melodies

Press C[Play] to play the scanned melody.

䂓For i-appli

If "Start i-appli" is displayed, select the i-appli

to launch it.

Scanned data screen sub menu

• Displayed items vary depending on the type of

scanned data.

aOn the Scanned data screen (134) X

M[Menu] Xperforms the following

operations

[Copy]

Copy selected URL, phone number or address on the

scanned result screen.

[Save the scanned data in a list]

Save the scanned data in a list.

[Save to Data box]

Saves the scanned image/melody to "Data box".

[Add to phonebook]

The scanned name/phone number, URL, mail address

is saved to the phonebook.

[Add bookmark]

The scanned URL is saved to the "Bookmark".

[Retry]

Scan the code again.

To scan split QR codes

aPerform Steps 1 to 3 of "Scanning Codes"

(P134)

bAfter the message "Scan next QR code"

appears, scan the next code

cRepeat b

• To cancel the scanning, press Q [Cancel], and

to readjust AF, press A[Retry].

File name of the scanned data

The scanned data is automatically named with the

year, month, date, hour, minute, and second. The

file cannot be renamed.

Example: If taken at: 2007/10/1 10:10

Japan Article Number code:

P2007_1001_1010_1.QR䇹

OR code: P2007_1001_1010_1.JAN䇹

Note

• Barcodes other than Japan Article Number

code and QR Codes and 2 dimensional codes

cannot be scanned.

• Barcodes may not be correctly scanned

because of scar, smudge, damage, printing

quality or reflection of lights.

• Some codes may not be scanned depending on

the type, size or QR code version.

• If trying to save more than 5 pieces of data, you

will see a message asking to delete older data

first. "Yes"XSelect ScannerXSelect "Yes".

• If Bar code reader can not scan the code within

30 seconds after activation, a message

indicating that it fails to scan the code appears.

And if the Bar code reader can not scan the

code in a certain period of time, it automatically

ends.

• If the address has invalid characters, nothing is

entered in the address.

<[Make Call]>

• Valid characters are numbers and symbols

(#, :, +, -, P, "(" and ")"). If the phone number

contains characters other than these, the call

cannot be made.

• If "Barcode i-appli to"(P189) is not set, you can

not start an i-appli from scanned data

Continue on the next page

136

Camera

Using/Deleting Saved Data

aScanner start screen (P134)XI[List]

䂓Deleting Saved Scanned

Data

Move the cursor to data to

be deleted, M

[Menu]X[Delete]XSelect

"Yes"

䂓Deleting Saved Scanned

Data

Scanned data list screen,

M[Menu]X

"Delete all"XEnter the terminal sssecurity

codeXSelect "Yes"

䂓To start scanning

On the Scan data list screen, press M[Menu]

X select "Scan".

bSelect the scanned data

For the operation after this, refer to the Step 3

(P134) of "Scanning Codes" depending on the

type of data.

Scanned Data

List

137

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-mode ................................................................................................................................ 138

Displaying the i-mode Menu ...................................................................... i-mode Menu 138

Accessing Sites

Accessing Sites................................................................................................................. 139

Operations on i-mode/Web Sites..................................................................................... 140

Saving Entries in My Menu................................................................................My Menu 141

Changing i-mode Password................................................. Change i-mode Password 142

Opening Web Site ...................................................................................Internet Access 142

Save and Quickly Display a Site/Homepage................................................Bookmarks 143

Save Site Contents..................................................................................... Screen Memo 144

Downloading Videos/Melodies from a Site

Saving Images from a Site or Screen Memo ...............................................Save image 145

Downloading Melodies from a Site....................................................................i-melody 146

Downloading Templates from a Site ........................................... Download Templates 146

Downloading Dictionaries from a Site ......................................Download Dictionaries 147

Useful i-mode Functions

Using the Phone To䋯Mail To䋯Web To 䋯 i-appliTo Functions

....................................................................... Phone To/Mail To/Web To/i-appliTofunction 147

Configuring i-mode Settings

Modifying i-mode Settings ...................................................................... i-mode Setting 147

Using the Message Service

When Receiving Messages .................................................................Receive Message 149

Checking for Messages ................................................................. Check new message 150

Displaying Messages in the Message Box ................................. MessageR/MessageF 150

Using Security Certificates

Handling SSL Certificates ............................................................... SSL Certificate Info 152

Using i-motion

i-motion .............................................................................................................................. 152

[Delete] .......................................................................................Introduction to i-motion 152

Using i-Channel

About i-Channel ................................................................................................................ 154

Displaying the i-mode Menu ............................................................................................ 155

Configuring i-Channel .........................................................................i-Channel Setting 155

138

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-mode

i-mode is a service that makes use of the display of

the FOMA handset supporting i-mode (i-mode

handset) to enable you to use online services such

as sites (programs) access, Internet access and

i-mode mail.

• i-mode is a fee-based service requiring a separate

subscription. For details on subscription, contact the

"DoCoMo Information Center" on the back of this

manual.

• The i-mode service contents are subject to change.

For details, refer to the latest "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode]".

Before Using i-mode

• Contents of sites (programs) and web sites are

generally protected by copyright law. Data, such

as text or images you download to the i-mode

handset from sites (programs) or web sites, can

be used only for personal entertainment but

cannot be used, in whole or in part, as it is or after

modification, for sale or redistribution, without

the consent of the copyright holders.

• It is possible that contents saved on the i-mode

handset (Mail, Message R/F, Screen memo,

i-appli, i-motion) or Bookmarks will be deleted if

the battery pack is removed for more than a

month.

It is recommended that you make a copy of

important data and keep it in a separate place.

DoCoMo is not responsible for lost data .

• If you insert another UIM or turn the handset

power on without the UIM, depending on the

model of the handset, still images, videos,

melodies, mail attachments (still images, videos

or melodies), screen memos or Messages R/F

cannot be viewed or played.

• When the data with UIM restriction is set as the

Stand-by display or Ring alert, the setting will

revert to its default if a different UIM is inserted or

the handset power is turned on without a UIM.

i-mode Menu

Displaying the i-mode

You can use i-mode functions from the i-mode

Menu.

aThe Stand-by displayXIXPerforms

the following operations

[iMenu]

Connect to the i-mode Center.→P139

[Bookmark]

Open the Bookmark folder list screen.→P143

[Screen memo]

Open the Screen memo folder list screen.→P144

[Last URL]

Open the last viewed i-mode site or web site.→P140

[Go to location]

Enter a URL to connect to the Internet.→P142

[Message]

Display a list of Messages R/F.→P150

[i-Channel]

Open the i-channel menu screen.→P155

[Check new messages]

Check whether i-mode mail or Message R/F are stored

at the i-mode Center.→P150

[i-mode setting]

Configures the handset's i-mode functions.→P147

i-mode menu

screen

139

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Accessing Sites

You can various services offered by IPs (Information

Providers).

• Services vary depending on the information

provider. Some sites require a separate

subscription.

ai-mode menu screen(P138)X"iMenu"

X"䊜䊆䊠䊷䋯ᬌ⚝ (Menu/Search)"

appears at the top of the screen during i-mode

communications.

• Press I [Stop] to interrupt a page download.

bSelect an item (link)

•I[Bookmark] : Save the URL to the current

page to bookmark.

•P : Exit i-mode. Select "Yes".

Site Display Screen Sub Menu

aSite being displayedXM[Menu]X

Performs the following operations

[Bookmark]

[Screen memo]

[Save image]

Save images contained in the displayed page.→P145

[Show properties]

[Go to location]

[Home]

Connects to the URL set as the "Home" page.

[Reload]

If the site is changed, the browser is updated with the

site's new contents.

䌛䊜䊷䊦૞ᚑ䌝

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the open page

pasted in the message text. Go to Step 2 in "Creating

and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161).

Select from the following options when a linked item is

selected.

[Change char code]

If characters do not display correctly, try changing the

character encoding.

[Add to phonebook]

Save the highlighted phone number or mail address to

the phonebook.→P141

[Retry]

Play, from the start, the animation/Flash file contained

in the displayed page.

Note

• When a number appears in front of a linked

item, press the corresponding Dial Key to visit

the site. It may not be possible to connect to

some sites.

• Some sites require the "serial number of your

mobile phone/UIM" to be sent in order to gain

access.

The "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM"

is sent to the IP (Information Provider) so that

the IP can recognize you and provide

customized information. The serial number is

also used to judge whether the contents that the

IP provides can be used on your mobile phone.

The "serial number of your mobile phone/UIM

card" is sent via the Internet to the IP

(Information Provider) and it may be seen by a

third party. This action does not reveal your

postal address, age, or sex to the information

provider.

C[Select]

Save

List

䋺

Save the URL of the open site as a Bookmark.

Go to Step 2 in "Saving in Bookmarks" (P143).

䋺

Open the Bookmark folder list screen.

→

P143

Save

List

䋺

Save the displayed page to the Screen memo.

→

P140

䋺

Open the Screen memo folder list screen.

→

P140

ShowURL

Page

Properties

Certificates

䋺Display the URL of the open page.

䋺Display the URL and title of the open

page.

䋺If the displayed Screen memo is an SSL

page, the SSL certificate is displayed.

XSelect certificate

Enter

URL

history

䋺

You can view a web site by entering its URL.

Go to Step 2 (P142) of "Opening Web Site".

䋺

You can visit a web site by selecting an entry in

the URL history. Go to Step 2 (P142) of "Using

the URL History".

This page

䋺

Attaches the URL of the current page.

䋺

Attaches the URL of the link.

Continue on the next page

140

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[Settings]

When an SSL page is acquired

The right screen opens when

you access an SSL site. After

acquisition is completed, the

SSL page opens and is

displayed on the top of the

screen.

To return to a normal site

The right screen opens when

you return to a non-SSL site.

Select "Yes" to return to a

normal site, and

disappears.

Last URL

Open the Most Recently Accessed

Web Site

After i-mode is terminated, the URL of the last open

page is saved in "Last URL". You can re-connect to

the most recently accessed page using Last URL.

ai-mode menu screen (P138) X"Last

URL" XC[Connect]

Operations on i-mode/

Web Sites

This section describes basic operations on i-mode/

Web sites (pages).

Going Back to the Previous Page/

Going to the Next Page

FOMA handset temporarily saves the displayed site

data in a cache.

Data saved to the cache can be displayed, without

visiting the site, by pressing J.

• However, the site will be reloaded if the data is larger

than the cache size, or if the site requires the latest

information always be loaded.

• Entered characters or settings at the site will not be

stored in the cache.

• Terminating i-mode deletes data from the cache.

Ex. Pages are displayed in the order of Screen

"A"→"B"→"C"→"B"→"D"

If opening the pages in the order "A"→"B"→"C",

then returning to "B", and opening "D", "C" is

deleted from the cache. Pressing J displays

"B"→"D".

Display image

Sound effect

settings

i-motion type

䋺Set whether to display images

contained on the current page.

X"On"/"Off"

䋺Set whether to play sound effects in

the Flash file contained in the site.

X"ON"/"OFF"

䋺

Set i-motion acquisition settings.

→

P153

Note

• If characters do not display correctly, repeat the

operation. However, after changing the code 4

times, the default character code restores.

• Characters may not be displayed correctly even

after repeatedly changing the code.

The new character encoding is valid only for the

open site.

• Images may not be displayed correctly even set

to "Display". In that case, appears.

Note

• If the SSL Certificate has already expired or the

site does not support SSL, a warning indicating

that this site may not be secure may appear.

When connecting, select "Yes". However, your

personal information (credit card number or

contact address) may not be sent safely.

Note

• When a Flash file is played, displayed action

may be different from a standard site display.

㵺䊕䊷䉳䈱⴫␜䈱㗅⇟

㵺↹㕙䇸 D䇹䈎䉌 ೨䈱䊕䊷䉳䉕 ⴫␜䈘䈞䈢

䇭䈫䈐䈱㗅

⇟

141

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Selecting Links or Items

You may need to perform operations using the

following items while connected to i-mode. For

details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode]".

Displaying Flash Animations

The FOMA handset supports Flash, an animation

technology using images and sounds. You can

access sites that provide various kinds of

animations using the handset. You can also

download a Flash file and set it as the Stand-by

display.

Adding Mail Address/Phone

Number to Phonebook

Saves the displayed phone number or mail address

on the site page to the phonebook.

aDisplayed siteXMove cursor to Phone

number/Mail address XM[Menu]X

"Add to Phonebook"X"Yes"

Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the

Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P80).

My Menu

Saving Entries in My

Frequently accessed sites can be saved in My

Menu for quick connection.

• Up to 45 entries can be saved in My Menu.

• Some sites cannot be saved in My Menu.

aDisplay a site to saveXSelect "䊙䉟䊜

䊆䊠䊷⊓㍳(Store in My Menu)"

• Item names may vary depending on the site.

bSelect i-mode password text boxX

Enter i-mode passwordX"OK"

• The entered i-mode password is masked by

asterisks "䋪".

• i-mode password→P142

Accessing a Site from My Menu

ai-mode menu screen (P138) X"iMenu"

X"English iMenu" X"My Menu"X

Select the site to visit

Name Display

example Details

Radio button (Not selected) You can select

only 1 choice.

(Selected)

Check box (Not selected) You can select

multiple choices.

(Selected)

Text Box Enter text. Select

a text box to open

the text entry

screen.

Pull down

Menu Select an item

from a list of

options.Click pull

down menus to

show these

options.

Note

• Perform the following steps to transfer data from

the FOMA handset, such as Phonebook entries,

your own number, or data scanned with the

Barcode reader, into a text box. M[Menu]X

"Quote"X"Phonebook"/"Own number"/"Bar

code reader".

Note

• Even if a Flash file is shown, the animation may

not be shown correctly.

• Some Flash files can use data saved on your

handset. To allow Flash files to use the data, set

"Use phone info" to "Yes".

• Some Flash files play sound effects. To turn off

sound effects, set "Sound effect" to "OFF".

• If you play a Flash file with vibration set, the

handset vibrates regardless of what the

"Sounds&Vibration" setting is on the handset.

• Flash files are not displayed if "Image" is set to

"OFF".

• In some cases, the Flash file cannot be viewed

if it was saved or set as a Screen memo, but can

be viewed on the site.

• Flash sound effects are not played if they are

set to the Stand-by display / Call Display.

Note

• When you subscribe to a fee-based site in

"䊜䊆䊠䊷䋯ᬌ⚝ (Menu/Search)", .

142

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Change i-mode Password

Changing i-mode Password

"i-mode Password" (4 digit) is required to subscribe

to and unsubscribe from Message Services or

fee-based i-mode sites, or configure Email settings.

The password is set to "0000" by default. Change it

to a number of your own choice. Do not reveal your

i-mode password to others.

ai-mode menu screen(P138)X"iMenu"

X"English iMenu"X"Options"X

"Change i-mode Password"

bSelect "Current Password" text boxX

Enter i-mode password (4 digits)

cSelect "New Password" text boxX

Enter new i-mode password (4 digits)

dSelect "New Password (Confirmation)"

text boxXEnter new i-mode password

(4 digits)

e"Select"

Internet Access

Opening Web Site

You can view a web site by entering its URL. A URL

consists of half-pitch alphanumeric characters and

symbols.

ai-mode menu screen(P138)X"Go to

location"

b"Input Address" XEnter the URL X

C[Set]

• You can enter up to 256 half-pitch characters.

Using the URL History

Up to 10 previously entered URLs are stored as the

URL History. You can visit a web site by using the

URL history.

ai-mode menu screen (P138)X"Go to

location"X"URLhistory"

URL History List Screen is shown.

bSelect the url to display

URL History List Screen Sub Menu

aURL history list screen(P142)XMove

cursor over URL historyXM[Menu]

XPerform the following operation

[Connect]

Connect to the selected site in the URL history.

[Edit URL]

Edit and connect to the site of the selected URL.

XEdit URLXC[Set]

[Delete]

[Compose mail]

Create i-mode mail with the URL of the selected

Bookmark in the message text. Go to Step 2 in

"Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161).

Note

• If you forget the i-mode password, you need to

bring an ID such as your driver's license to a

service counter such as DoCoMo shop to have

the i-mode password reset to "0000".

Note

• Web sites that do not support i-mode may not

be viewed correctly.

• When connected by entering the same URL as

one in the history, the old information is

overwritten and the entry is shown on top as the

latest URL entry in the history.

Note

• If more than 10 URLs are entered, the oldest

URLs will be overwritten.

• The URL visited will be re-displayed at the top of

the URL history list.

Delete

this item

Deletes

selected

item

Delete

all

䋺Delete the selected/displayed URL history

entry. X"Yes"

䋺Select and delete an entry in the URL

history.

XCheck off the URL to be deletedXI

"Done"X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], choose "Mark all" and

"Release all"

䋺Delete entire URL history.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

143

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Bookmarks

Save and Quickly

Display a Site/

Homepage

Save frequently viewed sites or web sites in

Bookmarks to display the page quickly.

Saving in Bookmarks

• Up to 100 URLs can be saved in Bookmarks for all

folders.

aBrowse a web page XI[Bookmark]

bEdit the title & URLXI[Done]X

Select the save folder

• If there is already the same URL saved, a

confirmation screen to overwrite appears.

Select "Yes".

Accessing Web Sites from

Bookmarks

ai-mode menu screen(P138)X

"Bookmar k"

•I [Add]:You can add a folder. Up to 16 full-

pitch or 32 half-pitch characters can be entered

for a folder name.

bSelect a Folder

cSelect the url to display

•I[URL] : Shows the URL.

Bookmark Folder List Screen Sub Menu

aBookmark folder list screen(P143)X

Move cursor to folderXM[Menu]

XPerform the following operation

[Manage folders]

[Delete]

[Send all via IrDA]

Send all bookmarks via Infrared.

XEnter security codeXEnter Auth. Password

X"Yes"

[Copy all microSD]

Copies all bookmarks to a microSD memory card.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

[Memory status]

Displays number of saved bookmarks.

Note

• Up to 256 half-pitch characters can be saved for

each URL Bookmark.

• Up to 12 full-pitch or 24 half-pitch characters

can be saved for a Bookmark title.

• If the maximum number of Bookmarks has been

saved, an confirmation screen is shown.

Choose "Yes"XSelect folderXSelect Bookmark

to delete XSelect folder to save in.

Icon Description

(Grey) "Bookmark" (pre-installed folder)

(Blue) User defined folder

Bookmark

Folder List

Screen

Create folder

Edit folder name

Sort folder

䋺Create a folder. Up to 16 full-pitch

or 32 half-pitch characters can be

entered for a folder name.

XEnter folder name

䋺Edit selected folder name.

XEnter folder name

䋺Sort folders.

Select certificate

Delete Folder

Delete all

䋺Delete selected folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

䋺Deletes select folder's bookmarks

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Note

• The pre-installed "Bookmark" folder cannot be

renamed, moved, or deleted.

• If there are bookmarks in the folder, user is

prompted to confirm deletion. Select "Yes" to

delete.

Bookmark list

screen

Continue on the next page

144

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Bookmark Folder List Screen Sub Menu

aBookmark list screen(P143)XMove

cursor to folderXM[Menu]XPerform

the following operation

[Connect]

Connect to the selected bookmark's site.

䌛Edit title䌝

Edit the title & URL of the selected Bookmark.

XEdit title & URLXI[Done]

[Move]

[Delete]

[URL]

Display the URL of the selected Bookmark.

[Copy URL]

Copy the URL of the selected Bookmark.

䌛Compose message䌝

Attach the selected bookmark to a new i-mode mail.

Go to Step 2 (P161) in "Creating and Sending i-mode

Mail".

[Ir exchange]

䌛Copy to microSD card]

[Memory status]

Displays number of saved bookmarks.

Screen Memo

Save Site Contents

Save displayed site contents as a screen memo.

Saved Screen memo pages can be opened without

connecting to i-mode.

Saving Screen Memos

• Up to 50 Screen memos can be saved. However, the

number may be less if the saved pages are large.

• Each page can have up to a maximum of 100KB.

aSite displayedXM[Menu]X"Screen

memo"X"Save"X"Yes"

Viewing Screen Memos

ai-mode menu screen(P138)X"Screen

memo"

bSelect the Screen Memo to Display

The Screen memo detail screen is displayed.

•I[URL] : Shows the URL.

Move

this

Move

selected

Move all

䋺Move the selected bookmarks to another

folder.

XSelect destination folder

䋺Select bookmark and move.

XCheck off the bookmark to moveXI

[Done]XSelect destination folder

• Press M[Menu], choose "Mark all",

"Release all".

䋺Move all mail in the folder to another folder.

XSelect destination folder

Delete

Deletes

selected

item

Delete

all

䋺Delete selected bookmark.

X"Yes"

䋺Delete selected bookmark.

XCheck off the URL to be deletedXI

[Done]X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], Choose "Mark all" and

"Release all"

䋺Delete all bookmarks.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Send

Sendall

data

䋺Sends selected bookmark via Infrared.

X"Yes"

䋺Send bookmarks in folder via infrared.

XEnter security codeXEnter Auth.

Password X"Yes"

Copy one

Copy all

䋺Copies selected bookmark to microSD

memory card.

X"Yes"

䋺Copies selected bookmark to microSD

memory card.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Note

• If the Screen memos save limit has been

reached, user will be prompted to select

something to delete. To continue, choose

"Yes"Xand select a Screen memo to delete.

Note

• The information saved in Screen memo is as of

the time it was saved. The memo may not

contain the latest information.

Screen memo

List Screen

145

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Screen Memo List Screen's Sub Menu

aBookmark folder list screen(P144)X

Move cursor to Screen memoXM

[Menu]XPerform the following

operation

[View]

View selected Screen memo.

䌛Edit title䌝

Edit the title of the selected Screen memo.

XEdit the title

[Delete]

[URL]

Display selected Screen memo's URL.

[Protect on/off]

[Memory status]

Displays number of Screen memos

Screen Memo Detail Screen's Sub Menu

aScreen Memo details screen (P144)X

M[Menu]XPerform the following

operations

[Save image]

Save images contained in the Screen memo. Go to

Step 2 in "Saving Images from a Site or Screen memo"

(P145).

䌛Show properties䌝

[Add to phonebook]

Save the highlighted phone number or mail address to

the phonebook.→P141

䌛Retry䌝

Play a Flash movie or an animation contained in the

Screen Memo from the beginning.

[Sound effect]

Set whether to play sound effects of the Flash movie

contained in the Screen memo.

䌛Edit title䌝

Edit the title of the selected Screen memo.

XEdit the title

䌛Delete䌝

Delete Screen memos.

X"Yes"

䌛Protect on/off䌝

Protect or release the displayed Screen memo.

X"Yes"

Save image

Saving Images from a

Site or Screen Memo

You can save images contained in the site, Screen

memo to the handset.

• Obtained images will be saved in "i-mode" folder in

"My Pictures" of the "Data box".

Example: when saving the image viewed on site

aOn a site XM[Menu]X"Save image"

b"Select image" XSelect savable image

䂓To save the background image from a site

Select "Save background".

Delete

Deletes

selected

item

Delete

all

䋺Delete the selected Screen memo.

X"Yes"

䋺Delete selected Screen memo.

XCheck off the URL to be deletedXI

[Done]X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], Choose "Mark all" and

"Release all"

䋺Delete all bookmarks.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Protect On/Off

Protect

selected on/

off

Protect all on/

off

䋺Disable/Enable protection for the

selected Screen memo.

X"Yes"

䋺Select a Screen memo and toggle

"protect".

XCheck off the Screen memo to be

protectedXI[Done]X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], Choose "Mark

all" and "Release all"

䋺Delete all Screen memos.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

ShowURL

Page

Properties

Certificates

䋺Display the URL of the displayed Screen

memo.

䋺Display the URL and title of the open

Screen memo.

䋺If the displayed Screen memo is an SSL

page, the SSL certificate is displayed.

XSelect certificate

Off

䋺Play the Flash's sound effects.

䋺Don't play the Flash's sound effects.

Note

• Protected Screen memos cannot be deleted.

Release Screen memo(s) before deleting.

• Up to 10 Screen memos can be protected. The

number of Screen memos that can be protected

may vary depending on the data.

Savable images have

a dotted border.

Continue on the next page

146

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

c"Yes"

i-melody

Downloading Melodies

from a Site

• Downloaded melodies will be saved in "i-mode"

folder in "Melody" of the "Data box".

aOn a siteXSelect a melody

When the download completes, a confirmation

opens.

b"Save"

Play 䋺Plays a downloaded melody.

File property

䋺Displays downloaded melody's

information.

Back 䋺Return to site without saving

melody.

Download Templates

Downloading Templates

from a Site

You can download templates for Deco-mail.

• Downloaded templates will be saved in "Template of

the Mail menu" (P165).

aOn a siteXSelect a template

When the download completes, a confirmation

opens.

b"Save"

Preview : Display the downloaded template.

File property

: Displays downloaded template's information.

Compose message/Send Mail

: Use a downloaded template to create Deco-mail.

Back : Return to site without saving template.

cI[Done]

• To save a renamed file, CX rename the file X

Press I[Done].

Note

• Images cannot be saved if "Image display" is set

to "Not display".

• The file cannot be saved if a file of the same

name already exist in the folder.

• The FOMA handset's saved images may not

display correctly even if they can be displayed at

the site.

• Some obtained images may not be displayed

correctly.

•

Image files of JPEG, GIF, or Progressive JPEG

䋪

formats cannot be displayed after saving them if

their size (pixels) exceed the following size.

However, they can be output to external devices

as mail attachment...etc.

䋪 Progressive JPEG is an image format that

used in the Internet, being improved image

sharpness gradually as downloading

proceeds.

- JPEG image files that exceed 1600x1200

pixels

- GIF or Progressive JPEG image files that

exceed 800x600 pixels

䂓Information

The stored content may be lost due to the

handset failure or repair. DoCoMo is not

responsible for lost data. It is recommended

that you keep saved content from the handset

on a microSD memory card. You can connect

the handset to a PC using Data Link Software

and a FOMA USB Cable (optional) and save

data to the PC.

Note

• Download may not be possible depending on

the site.

• The file cannot be saved if a file of the same

name already exist in the folder.

• Some downloaded melodies may not play

correctly.

• Some downloaded melodies may have a

section to be played already specified. These

melodies will be played in their entirety under

playback, however, as a melody set for a

ringtone only the specified part is played.

䂓Information

The stored content may be lost due to the

handset failure or repair. DoCoMo is not

responsible for lost data. It is recommended

that you keep saved content from the handset

on a microSD memory card. You can connect

the handset to a PC using Data Link Software

and a FOMA USB Cable (optional) and save

data to the PC.

147

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Download Dictionaries

Downloading

Dictionaries from a Site

• Downloaded dictionaries are saved in "Download

dictionary" (P254)

• Up to 10 dictionaries can be saved. However, up to

5 can be used.

aOn a siteXSelect dictionary

After downloading the dictionary, the dictionary is

saved automatically on "Download Dictionary".

Phone To/Mail To/Web To/i-appliTofunction

Using the Phone To䋯

Mail To䋯Web To䋯

i-appliTo Functions

When the highlighted phone number,Email address

or URL is displayed on site page or mail, you can

use this function to easily make a call, send an

i-mode mail or display a web site.

• Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To, or Web To

function in mail sent from a PC may not be available.

Phone To/AV Phone To Function

Make a voice call/video call (AV Phone). To the

highlighted phone number at a site or in a mail

message.

aSelect phone numberXPerform the

following operation

[Make Call]䋺 Make a voice call.

Video Call 䋺 Make a Video Phone.

Copy 䋺 Copies the selected phone number.

Mail To Function

You can send mail to an Email address highlighted

on a site page or mail.

aSelect mail address

• Go to Step 3 in "Creating and Sending i-mode

Mail" (P161).

Web To Function

Access a URL highlighted on a site page or mail.

aSelect URL

• In case of mail, press C[Connect] after Step1.

i-appli To Function

You can start i-appli from a URL highlighted on a

site or in i-mode mail.

• If there is no check in "Set i-appli to"(P189), "Site

i-appli to", "Mail i-appli to", the i-appli does not

function.

aSelect i-appli informationX"Yes"

i-mode Setting

Modifying i-mode

Settings

Set i-mode or Message R/F function.

Communication

Configuring Communication

Settings

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting"

X"Communication"XPerform

the following operation

[Connection timeout]

Set the time until the connection is automatically

terminated if no response was returned due to network

traffic.→P148

Note

• Using Downloaded Dictionaries→P254

Note

• The Phone To/AV Phone To function may not

be available depending on a site.

Note

• The Mail To function may not be available

depending on a site.

• Correct the Email address before sending Email

if necessary.

Note

• The Web To function may not be available

depending on a site.

• Display of a URL varies depending on a site.

• The Web To function is available using a

highlighted item other than a URL.

Note

• It may not be possible to save an i-appli that

immediately starts after using the i-appli To

function.

Default Check new messages :

All checkmarked

Continue on the next page

148

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[Check new messages]

Sets request settings when using "Check new

messages",

XCheck off item to checkXI[Done]

Display

Configuring Display Settings

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting"

X"Display" XPerform the

following operation

[Image]

Set whether to display images or Flash images

contained on the site page or Screen memo.

X"On"/"Off"

[Sound effect]

Set whether to play sound effects of the Flash movie

contained in the site/Screen memo.

X"ON"/"OFF"

[Use phone info]

When a Flash image is displayed on a site or in a

Screen memo, information saved on the handset may

be used. Sets whether to use the information on the

phone.

X"On"/"Off"

[Font size]

Set the font size for text on a site, Screen memo or

Message R/Fs.

X"Small"/"Standard"/"Large"

[Scroll]

Set the number of lines scrolled after pressing H on a

site, Screen memo or Message R/F.

X"1 line"/"3 lines"/"5 lines"/"Page"

[Message list]

Configures Message R/F list screen display.

[Auto-display]

Set to automatically display Messages R/F.→P150

[Melody auto play]

Set whether to automatically play melodies when

Messages R/F are displayed.→P150

Home

Configuring Home Settings

To set the home URL, select "Home" from the site

display screen sub menu.

bSelect "Enable" XSelect "http" field X

Enter the URL XI[Done]

Others

Configuring Other Settings

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting"

X"Others" XPerform the

following operation

[Check settings]

Confirm the contents set in "i-mode setting".

[Reset settings]

Reset the contents set in "i-mode setting" to the

default.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Connection Timeout

Setting the Connection Timeout

Set the time until the connection is automatically

terminated if no response was returned due to

network traffic.

Default

Image:ON

Sound effect : ON

Use phone info: Yes

Font size: Standard

Scroll: 1 line

Mail list: 2 lines

One Line

Two Lines

䋺Display subject alone on one line.

䋺Displays subject and receive time on two

lines.

Note

<Image>

• Images may not be displayed correctly even set

to "Display". In that case, appears.

• Even if set to "ON", Sound Effects may not used

depending on the Flash file.

• When this option is set to "Use", the battery

level, signal strength, Date & Time, Ring

Volume, Language, and handset model

information may be sent to IP (Information

Provider) via the Internet, and a third party may

intercept the information.

Default Disable, No URL

Note

• If "Home" is set to "Disable", even selecting

"Home" does not open the specified page. The

URL entered in the "http://" field will remain.

Default 60 seconds

149

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting"

X"Communication" X

"Connection Timeout"

"60 seconds"/

"90 seconds"/"Unlimited"

• If "Unlimited" is selected, the connection will not

be automatically cancelled.

Host Selection

Changing the Access Point from

i-mode

Set an APN (Access Point Name) when you use

services other than i-mode (DoCoMo). i-mode and

i-mode mail become unavailable when you connect

to an APN other than DoCoMo.

Add Access Point

[Menu]

(Settings)

"International

Roaming"

"Network"

"Host Selection"

Host Selection screen opens.

bI[Add]XEnter security codeX

Perform the following operation

[Host name]

Enter the host name within 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch

characters.

XEnter access point name

[Host number]

Enter the host number within 99 half-pitch alphanumeric

characters.

XEnter access point number

[Host address]

Enter the host address within 30 half-pitch alphanumeric

characters.

XEnter access point address

[Host address 2]

Enter the host address within 30 half-pitch

alphanumeric characters.

XEnter access point address

cI[Done]

Changing the Access Point

aHost Selection screen (P149) XSelect

Access point to change

Access Point Screen Sub Menu

aAccess Point screen (P149) XMove

cursor to Access pointXM[Menu]

XPerform the following operation

• "i-mode" functions cannot be carried out while

selecting an access point.

[Add new]

Add new connection.→P149

[Edit]

Edit the access point settings.

XEnter security codeXEdit Access point settingsX

I[Done]

[Delete]

Delete the selected Access point.

X"Yes"XEnter security code

[View]

Display the selected access point's settings.

•C[Edit] : Edit the access point settings.

Receive Message

When Receiving

Messages

When the handset is in the service area, Messages

R/F are sent automatically from the i-mode Center.

When Messages R/F arrive, the display, ringtone or

vibration notifies you of new messages.

• Up to 100 both message Rs/Fs can be saved.

However, the number of savable messages varies

depending on the message size.

Viewing New Messages

When Message R/F arrives, the latest message is

appears automatically.

• "Message auto-display" can be configured to allows

the detail screen to automatically open when

receiving a message R/F.→P150

Note

• Even if this option is set to "Unlimited", the

connection attempt may be terminated because

of the radio wave reception level.

Default i-mode

䋪If you use the i-mode service of DoCoMo, do

not change the access point.

Note

• Pake-Hodai is not applied to packet

communication with an APN other than

"i-mode".

• When an access point is changed, the ticker of

the i-Channel does not appear. When the

information is updated or you download the latest

information by pressing Q for 1+ seconds, the

ticker will be turned on automatically.

• If the set Access point is deleted, it is replaced

with "i-mode".

150

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

aAutomatically Receiving a Message

R/F When it Arrives

• After messages are received, the reception

result of Messages R/F is displayed.

• You are forced to return to the screen before

receiving mails if no operation is performed for

approximately 15 seconds,

Auto-display Message

Displaying Messages

Automatically

Set how to automatically display MessageR or

MessageF.

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting"

X"Display" X"Auto-display"

XPerform the following operation

MessageR preferred

: If a Message R and F are received

simultaneously, MessageR is automatically

shown.

MessageR Only

: Only MessageR are automatically displayed.

MessageF preferred

: If a Message R and F are received

simultaneously, MessageF is automatically

shown.

MessageF Only

: Only MessageF are automatically displayed.

Auto-display off

: Messages are not displayed automatically.

Melody Auto Play

Playing a Melody Automatically

When a Message is Displayed

Set whether to automatically play melodies when

Messages R/F are displayed.

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting

X"Display" X

"Melody Auto

Play"

"ON"/"OFF"

Check new message

Checking for Messages

MessageR/F that were not received because the

handset was out of service area are stored at the

i-mode Center and , , and will be

appeared on the top on the screen. Checking new

messages downloads the stored messages.

• You cannot check new messages when the handset

is out of service area.

• Set what to check (i-mode mail and Messages R/F)

in "Check new messages" (P180).

i-mode menu screen(

P138

)

Check

New Message"

When check has completed, the reception result

screen opens.

b"MessageR"/"MessageF"

MessageR/MessageF

Displaying Messages in

the Message Box

When Messages R/F arrive from the i-mode Center,

, appears at the top of the screen.

ai-mode menu

screen(

P138

)X"Me

ssage"X"Message

R"/"Message F"

aReceived date

bSubject

bSelect a MessageR/F

•I[Delete] : Deletes

the Selected

MessageR/F

aReceived date and time

bSubject

䂓Icons displayed on the

Message R/F list/detail

screen

Default MessageR preferred

Default ON

Note

• Incoming Message R/F is saved at the i-mode

Center when:

- When Power is off

- During Video Call

- During Self mode settings

- When out of service area

- When FOMA handset's Message R/F is full.

Icon Description

䋯Unread Messages R/F

䋯Read Messages R/F

Protected.

Received date and time

䋯䋯 A melody/still picture/video is

attached.

Ex.:MessageR

List Screen

Ex.:MessageR

details

screen

151

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Messages R/F List Screen Sub Menu

aMessageR/F List screen(P150)XMove

cursor to messageXM[Menu]

XPerform the following operation

[Delete]

[View settings]

[Filter]

Shows MessageR/F that meet certain conditions.

[Read all]

Set all MessageRs/Fs to "read".

X"Yes"

䌛Protect on/off䌝

[Memory status]

Display number of MessageRs/Fs.

Messages R/F Detail Screen Sub Menu

aMessageR/F Details Screen (P150)X

M[Menu]XPerform the following

operations

[Delete]

Delete the MessageR/F.

X"Yes"

䌛 ଻⼔䋯଻⼔⸃㒰䌝

Protect or release the displayed MessageR/F.

X"Yes"

䌛㔚⹤Ꮽ⊓㍳䌝

Save the addressor phone #/mail address highlighted

in the MessageR/F to the phonebook.

XSelect the address to save to the phonebookX

"Yes"

Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the Phonebook

from Received or Dialed Calls" (P80).

[Attach file]

Save/Play/View an attachment from the currently

displayed messageR/F.

Perform the following steps to save attachments.

XSelect the attachment X"Save" X"Yes"

Perform the following steps to play/view the

attachment.

X"Pay/View"

Attaches multiple copies of the same

file.

Damaged file.

䋨䋩

(Grey) Deleted(Ex. when a still image file)

䋨䋩

(blue) Not received(Ex. when a still image

file)

䋨䋩 Obtain a part of a message(Ex. when

a still image file)

Error

䋨䋩 Attachment with UIM operation

restriction activated

Subject

Delete

Deletes

selected

item

Del all

read

Delete all

䋺Delete the selected MessageR/F.

X"Yes"

䋺Delete selected MessageR/F.

XCheck off the MessageR/F to be

deletedXI[Done]X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], choose from "Mark

all", "Release all", "Switch view"

䋺Delete all MessageRs/Fs.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

䋺Delete all MessageRs/Fs.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Switch

View 䋺Configures Message R/F list screen display.

Display subject alone on one line.

Displays subject and receive time on two lines.

Sort 䋺Sorts MessageR/F by the set conditions.

X"Subject Asc"/"Subject Desc"/"Date Asc"/

"Date Desc"

Subject

Unread

Read

Protected

Not

protected

Image

Melody

All

䋺Only display MessageR/F with a

particular subject XEnter subject

䋺Only display unread messages.

䋺Only display read MessageR/F.

䋺Only display protected MessageR/F.

䋺Only display unprotected MessageR/F.

䋺Only display MessageR/F with

attachments.

䋺Only display MessageR/F with melodies.

䋺Display all MessageRs/Fs.

Protect On/Off

Protect

selected on/

off

Protect all

Unprotect all

䋺Protect or release the displayed

MessageR/F.

X"Yes"

䋺Select a MessageR/F and toggle

"protect".

XCheck off the MessageR/F to be

protectedXI[Done]X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], choose from

"Mark all", "Release all", "Switch

view"

䋺Protect all MessageRs/Fs.

X"Yes"

䋺Unprotect all MessageRs/Fs.

X"Yes"

Note

• If there are unread MessageRs/Fs, user is

prompted to confirm deletion. Select "Yes" to

delete.

Continue on the next page

152

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

[Inline image]

Save an image inserted in the currently displayed

messageR/F.

XSelect the image X"Save" X"Yes"

• To view information about the selected image,

select "Info.".

Save background

Save the background of the displayed messageR/F.

X"Save" X"Yes"

•To view information about the image, select "Info.".

[View settings]

SSL Certificate Info

Handling SSL Certificates

View SSL Certificate contents, or set valid or invalid.

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting"

X"Certificates"

Certificate list screen opens.

•C[Select] : Display the selected certificate's

details.

Move the cursor onto the certificate

[Enable] / [Disable]

•M[Menu] : Select "Certificate Info" and

"Enable/Disable" If you enable "Certificate Info",

the detail of the selected certificate will be

shown.

Certificate List Screen Sub Menu

aCertificateList screen(P152)XMovethe

cursor onto the certificateXM

[Menu]XPerform the following

operations

䌛Certificate info.䌝

Display detailed information about the selected

certificate.

䌛Valid/Invalid䌝

Set the selected certificate to valid or invalid.

Certificates used for SSL communication

Issued by an authentication company and saved

on the handset by default.

i-motion

i-motions are composed of video and sound files.

They can be obtained from sites, played, saved, and

even as the Stand-by display or Ringer ID, etc.

i-motion Types

There are 2 types of i-motion movies.

䂓Standard

There are 2 forms standard type.

aPlayback after downloading-type (Up to 500KB)

bPlayback while downloading-type (Up to 500KB)

• Some standard type i-motion movies cannot be

saved.

䂓Streaming Type

Playback while downloading an i-motion movie. Up

to 2MB of i-motion can be played. The data is

deleted after playback. It cannot be saved on the

FOMA handset.

Introduction to i-motion

Downloading i-motion

Movies from Sites

Up to 1000 i-motion movies can be saved. However,

the savable number depends on the amount of the

data.

• Downloaded i-motions are saved in the "i-mode"

folder under "i-motion" in the "Data box".

aOn a siteXSelect an i-motion

• When "i-motion auto play" is set to "ON", an

i-motion movie is played automatically after

being downloaded. Operations during Playback

→P201

Scroll

Font Size

䋺Sets the number of lines scrolled when H

is pressed at the MessageR/F Display

Screen.

X"1 line"/"3 lines"/"5 lines"/"Page"

䋺Set a font size for message R/F display

screen.

X"Small"/"Standard"/"Large"

Note

• Up to 100 MessageR and up to 100 MessageF

can be protected.

• Protected messages cannot be deleted.

Default All valid

Note

• i-motion movies that can be downloaded and

played are in MP4 (Mobile MP4) format.

i-motion movies in ASF format cannot be

downloaded or played.

• When you fast forward/rewind an i-motion

movie during playback, only sound is played;

video may not be displayed correctly.

153

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

䂓Streaming-Type i-motions

• Playback confirmation screen opens. When

"Yes" is selected, the i-motion plays during

download.

• If "i-motion type" is set to "Standard type",

streaming is impossible. If switching

between "Std/Streaming", please download

the i-motion again.→P153

bAfter downloadQX"Save"

Play

: Play a downloaded i-motion movie.

File property

: Display detailed information about the

downloaded i-motion movie.

Back

: Returns to the site display page without saving

the i-motion.

When Ticker Text is Highlighted

When a ticker is set in an i-motion movie, the ticker

is displayed during playback. You can use the

Phone To, AV Phone To, Mail To or Web To function

by selecting the highlighted phone number, mail

address or URL.

aAfter ending i-motion playbackXM

[Yes]

䂓To use the above functions while playing

i-motion

Pause the i-motion to use Phone To, AV

Phone To, Mail To, Web To function. While

playing i-motionXC/UXCXM[Yes].

i-motion Auto Play

Setting Whether to Play an

i-motion Movie Automatically

Toggle playing an i-motion automatically when it is

downloaded from a site or mail.

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting"

"i-motion"

"i-motion Auto

Play"

"ON"/"OFF"

i-motion type

Set i-motion Acquisition Aettings.

When downloading a new i-motion, sets the

i-motion's type.

i-mode menu screen (P138)

"i-mode

setting"

X"i-motion" X"i-motion type"

XSelect he type

Standard

: Only download standard-type i-motions.

Standard type / Streaming type

: Download standard and streaming-type

i-motions.

Note

• Depending on the connected site or i-motion

movie, the i-motion movie may not be

downloaded, or played during the download.

• If you play a movie while downloading it, the

movie may stop playing or the picture may

become distorted due to signal reception.

• Some i-motion movies cannot be saved on the

FOMA handset.

• The file cannot be saved if a file of the same

name already exist in the folder.

• Some i-motion movies have playback

restrictions.

If an i-motion has a restricted playback

(IE: repetitions/length of time, or an expiry date),

is displayed. An i-motion movie with

playback period restrictions cannot be played

prior to or after the restriction period.

• Some downloaded i-motion movies may not

play correctly.

䂓Information

The stored content may be lost due to the

handset failure or repair. DoCoMo is not

responsible for lost data. It is recommended

that you keep saved content from the handset

on a microSD memory card. You can connect

the handset to a PC using Data Link Software

and a FOMA USB Cable (optional) and save

data to the PC.

Default ON

Note

• Even if set to "OFF", streaming-type i-motions

will be auto-played.

Default Standard

Note

• When downloading streaming-type i-motions,

"Std/Streaming" must be set.

154

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

About i-Channel

The service which DoCoMo or IP (Information

Provider) provide graphical view of information such

as news or weather forecasts, especially for

i-Channel compatible handset.

It periodically updates information and displays it as

a ticker on the Stand-by display. If Qis pressed

for more than 1 second, the channel list is shown.

Moreover, rich detail information can be acquired

by selecting favorite channels from a channel list.

• Display method of Channel list→P155

• For precautions to take and more details about

i-Channel, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide

(i-mode<FOMA>)".

㶎䋺 Screens shown are images. They differ from

actual ones.

There are 2 types of channels: "Basic channels" and

"Favorite channels".

"Basic channels" is channel provided by DoCoMo.

Because it is registered by default, it is immediately

available upon subscription to i-Channel. Packet

communication charges applying to automatic

update of information delivered for "Basic

channels" is included in i-Channel service fee.

"Favorite channels" is provided by IP (Information

Provider) other than DoCoMo and available when

you register a favorite one. Packet communication

charges applying to automatic update of

information delivered for "Favorite channels" is not

included in i-Channel service fee.

Information for "Basic channels" and "Favorite

channels" can be displayed as a ticker on the

Standby-display.

• Some "Favorite channels" may require an

information fee for use.

• Some "Favorite channels" may require a separate

subscription to their sponsoring IP (Information

Provider).

• Both "Basic channels" and "Favorite channels"

require packet communication charges for viewing

detailed information from a channel list, on top of the

i-Channel service fee.

• The i-Channel service charge does not includes the

packet communication charges for auto-updating

the "Basic channels" information that is delivered

during International Roaming.

• i-Channel is a fee-based service requiring a

separate subscription (i-mode contract is necessary

for subscription).

• Operations→P155

Trial Service

When you use an i-Channel compatible handset and

have subscribed to i-mode, but not to i-Channel for

the subscriber line using the i-Channel compatible

handset, you can use "Basic channels" for a

predetermined period of time without service

charges. Note that you will be charged packet

communication charges apply for viewing detail

information from a channel list.

• For precautions and details of using the trial service,

refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]".

Trial service will be started automatically in principle

when a predetermined period of time has elapsed

after inserting UIM and starting to use i-Channel

compatible handset. When automatic start is

disabled, i-channel can be started by pressing Q

for one second. Trial service can be used only once

for 1 subscriber line. Trial service will be terminated

automatically when a predetermined period of time

has elapsed after the start. For the procedure to

terminate it halfway, refer to "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode]".

Before subscribing to the service

When you have not subscribed to

i-Channel

After the service subscription procedures

have been completed

After subscribing to i-Channel, a

ticker appears on the Stand-by

display. At a fixed period of time,

information is received or

channel list is displayed.

Pressing Q for more

than 1 second brings up

the channel list. You can

view in list format

information, etc. given in

ticker of each channel.

You can view

detail

information

screen of each

channel by

selecting it.

Q(for 1+ sec)

IP (Information Provider)

i-mode Handset i-mode Center

Information of

Preference Channel

Information of

the Basic Channel

155

i-mode/i-motion/i-Channel

Displaying the i-mode

When subscribed to an i-Channel, information

appears, when received, as a ticker on the Stand-by

Display.

• To automatically display the ticker, set "Ticker

display" to "ON".→P155

• When Public Mode (Drive Mode) is set, the ticker will

not be displayed.

aThe Stand-by displayXQ(More than

1 second)

bSelect Channel item

The site is connected and detail information

appears.

•L : Returns to the channel list screen.

i-Channel Setting

Configuring i-Channel

You can set whether to display the ticker on the

Stand-by display or to set the ticker display style.

All the i-channel data in the FOMA handset will be

deleted.

aIX"i-Channel"XPerforms the

following operations

[i-Channel list]

Open the Channel list screen.

䌛Ticker setting䌝

䌛Reset i-Channel䌝

Deletes all i-channel information on the FOMA handset

and restores defaults. Ticker Display is also reset to

default settings.

X"Yes"

Note

• While receiving data, blinks.

• Even when information is received, no ring alert

or vibrator operates. Also, the Call Indicator

does not light/blink.

• Information may not be received when the

handset power is turned off, while out of service

area, or when the signal reception is weak.

Press Q to receive information. The Stand-by

display ticker will show the information

automatically. Also, information may not be

received while using default settings. In this

case, hold down Q. The ticker on the Stand-

by display will automatically display the

information.

• In some conditions, information may be

received only when a channel list is displayed.

• If you change the connection destination in

"Host selection" of "i-mode setting", the

connection destination of i-Channel is also

changed. (Normally, you do not need to change

the settings).

• The ticker will not appear after i-Channel is

cancelled.

• When an i-motion is set to the Standby display,

the ticker will not be shown during playback.

• There may be a notice of failure to acquire

channel information in the following cases.

- When i-Channel connection destination has

been changed

- When UIM has been replaced

Channel list

Ticker

(One

second or

Ticker

Default Ticker display : ON

Ticker speed: Normal

Ticker Display

Ticker speed

䋺

Set whether to display a Ticker on the

Stand-by display.

"ON"/"OFF"

䋺

Set the ticker display rate.

"Slow"/"Normal"/"Fast"

Note

• If you cancel the i-mode service before

canceling i-channel, the "Ticker Display" setting

remains.

157

Mail

Mail Functions of FOMA Handset.................................................................................... 158

What is i-mode Mail? ........................................................................................................ 158

Displaying Mail Menu.......................................................................................Mail Menu 160

Creating i-mode Mail/Deco-Mail

Creating and Sending i-mode Mail .........................Creating and sending i-mode mail 161

Creating and Sending Deco-mail.................................................................... Deco-mail 162

Creating Deco-mail Using Template.................................................................Template 164

Attaching a File ...........................................................................................Attaching file 166

Receiving/Operating i-mode Mail

When i-mode Mail is Received......................................... Automatic Reception of Mail 166

Selecting and Receiving i-mode Mail .....................................................Receive option 167

Checking for i-mode Mails ............................................................ Check new message 168

Replying to i-mode Mail............................................................ Replying to i-mode Mail 168

Forwarding i-mode Mail to Another Receiver......................... Forwarding i-mode Mail 168

Registering Mail Address/Phone Number to Phonebook ............................................. 169

Playing/Saving an Attached File from i-mode Mail ........................................................ 169

Operating Mail BOX

Displaying Mail in Received/Sent/Unsent Mailbox

......................................................Received Mail BOX/Sent Mail BOX / Unsent Mail BOX 170

Using Mail History

Using Mail Logs..............................................Received Mails/Sent Mails/Recent Mails 178

Configuring Mail Settings

Setting FOMA Handset Mail Functions Settings.........................................Mail setting 179

Using SMS (Short Message Service)

Creating and Sending SMS (Short Message Service) Message ...................................

.................................................................................................................. SMSCompose/Send 181

Automatically Receiving SMS (Short Message Service) Message......... Receive SMS 181

Checking for SMS (Short Message Service) Message .......................Check new SMS 182

Configuring SMS (Short Message Service) Settings .............................. SMS Settings 182

158

Mail

Mail Functions of FOMA

Handset

FOMA handset provides 2 mail functions: i-mode

mail and SMS.

• Using i-mode mail requires i-mode subscription.

• Using SMS requires no i-mode subscription.

Sending and Receiving Mail

FOMA Handset→FOMA Handset

Both i-mode mail and SMS can be used.

FOMA Handset

→

mova i-mode Handset

Both i-mode mail and SMS can be used.

• SMS sent from a FOMA handset is received by a

mova i-mode handset as an i-mode mail.

• When "SMS report request" is "ON", SMS cannot be

sent to a mova i-mode handset.

䋪䋺 This differs depending on the mova i-mode

handset settings.

mova i-mode Handset

→

FOMA Handset

i-mode mails and SMS sent from mova i-mode

handset can be received.

•Short mail䋪 sent from a mova i-mode handset can

be received by a FOMA handset as a SMS.

䋪䋺 Short mail is a service that allows sending and

receiving text messages with a mova handset.

What is i-mode Mail?

Upon subscription to i-mode, you can send and

receive e-mails via internet, as well as between

i-mode handsets (including mova handset).

On top of the text, a total of 2MB of attachments

can be sent in 10 files (JPEG, etc..). Also, i-mode

mail can be decorated by changing the font color,

size, or background color of the message text. In

addition, you can insert Deco-mail pictograms from

the many pre-installed ones that can be inserted in

the same manner as Pictographs, to easily create

and send expressive mail.

The Mail address given at i-mode subscription is as

below.

Before the "@", a random number is inserted;

please make certain of the Mail address.

Example: abc1234 ... 789xyz@docomo.ne.jp

Checking your mail address

"iMenu" →"English iMenu" →"Options" →"Mail

Settings" →"Confirm Mail Address"

• Between i-mode handsets (including mova

handsets), mails can be sent and received using

only the address preceding @.

• When sending mails from PC, etc. to FOMA

handset, use the whole address containing

@docomo.ne.jp.

•Sending mail →P161

• Receiving mail →P166

• The i-mode service contents are subject to

change. For details, refer to "Mobile Phone

User's Guide [i-mode]".

䂓Receive option

The subject of mail stored at the i-mode Center can

be viewed beforehand; it can then be deleted

(without downloading) or downloaded.→P167

Mail Setting

You can make various settings as described below.

"iMenu" → "English iMenu" → "Options" → "Mail

Settings" → Specify each item

• For details, refer to "Mobile Phone User's Guide

[i-mode]" that was provided when you subscribed

to i-mode.

䂓Changing your mail address [Mail Address

(Change Mail Address)]

You can change characters preceding mark @ in a mail

address, e.g., "docomo.xx_ab1234yz@docomo.ne.jp".

䂓Confirm Mail Address [Mail Address (Confirm

Mail Address)]

You can confirm the current mail address.

Up to 70 characters (Japanese)

Up to 160 characters (English)

Up to 5000 full-pitch characters

SMS SMS

i-mode Maili-mode Mail

FOMA handset FOMA hands

FOMA handset i-mode hands

mova servi

Up to 2000 full-pitch characters?

Up to 70 characters (Japanese)

Up to 160 characters (English)

SMS i-mode Mail

i-mode Mail i-mode Mail

FOMA hand

i-mode

handset

of mova service

Up to 50 characters

Up to 250 full-pitch characters

Short mail

Dial special

number 1655 SMS

i-mode Mail i-mode Mail

159

Mail

䂓Registering secret code [Mail Address (Other

Settings) →Register a Secret Code]

When using a mail address of format "mobile phone

number@docomo.ne.jp", you can register 4-digit

secret code in addition to the mail address.

Because mails with no secret code attached are not

received, you can avoid receiving unnecessary

messages.

䂓Resetting mail address [Mail Address (Other

Settings) →Reset Mail Address]

You can set your mail address to

"phone number@docomo.ne.jp".

䂓Spam Mail Prevention

You can set your mail address to "mobile phone

number@docomo.ne.jp".

aReject Mail with URL[Spam Mail Prevention)

→ Reject mail with URL]

Can set i-mode to reject mails classified by the

NetStar corporation as being from Dating, Adult,

Illegal and Insecure domains.

bReject/Receive Mail Settings [Receiving Mail

(Spam Mail Prevention) → Reject/Receive Mail

Settings]

• You can specify the senders from which you

receive mails among DoCoMo, au,

SoftBank, Tu-Ka and WILLCOM.

You can specify sender's domains or email

addresses from which you receive mails.

Also, you can exclude specific mail

addresses to reject, even if they are from the

accepted senders or domains you specified.

You can reject mail pretending to use a

mobile phone or PHS domain from Internet

other than the above.

cSMS Rejection Settings [Receiving Mail (Spam

Mail Prevention) → SMS Rejection Settings]

• You can restrict incoming SMS by selecting

an option from "SMS৻᜝ᜎุ (Reject All

SMS)", "㕖ㅢ⍮SMSᜎุ (Reject

Anonymous SMS)", "࿖㓙SMSᜎุ (Reject

Intl. SMS)" or "㕖ㅢ⍮SMS෸䈶࿖㓙SMSᜎ

ุ (Reject Anonymous and Intl. SMS)". You

can also view the current settings.

dRestricting reception of mails from mass i-mode

mail senders [Receiving Mail (Other Settings)

→Reject Mass i-mode Mail Senders]

• You reject 201st and subsequent i-mode

mails sent from one i-mode handset

(including mova handset) a day. "Reject" is

set by default, so you do not have to change

the settings to reject messages sent from

mass mail senders.

eReject Unsolicited Ad Mail [Receiving Mail

(Other Settings) → Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail]

• You reject reception of mails with "Reject

Unsolicited Ad Mail" description added to a

mail subject which are sent unilaterally for

advertisement and/or promotion without

agreement of the receiver. "Reject" is set by

default, so you do not have to change the

settings to reject such messages. (Senders

are obligated by law to give description "ᧂᛚ

⻌ᐢ๔䋪 (Unsolicited Ad Mail)" (6 full-pitch

characters) to the beginning of the mail

subject field.)

䂓Limiting mail size [Receiving Mail (Limit Mail

Size)]

You can limit i-mode mails to be received with the

predetermined size.

䂓Confirm Settings [Receiving Mail (Confirm

Settings)]

You can check the current settings of mail

reception/rejection and others.

䂓Suspending mail function [Suspend Mail]

You can suspend the mail function in the i-mode

Center when it is not necessary.

When Mail Cannot be Received

Mail delivered to i-mode Center will be immediately

sent to your i-mode handset. When the i-mode

handset is powered off or the i-mode service area

or due to other reasons, the mail is held at the i-

mode center, the center resends this mail to the i-

mode handset within a span of 720 hours by the

time you receive it.䋪

Also, if the Receive option settings are set, they

allow a user to set which i-mode mails will be

downloaded from the i-mode center.

䋪䋺 Mails you have not received are stored in i-mode

Center for 720 hours. Mail resend conditions

change according to the unsent condition.

Other Functions

䂓Sending/Receiving Files

i-mode mails can store 2MB of attachments that

can be of any type. A limit of 10 files, with a total

size of 2MB, can be attached and sent. When

receiving an i-mode mail (2MB), all files can be

received, or just the first 100KB (Auto receive file

attachment); any remaining files that are desired

can be selected and downloaded (Selected

attachment download). As well, the handset's file

send settings permit leaving files less than 100KB

on the server, letting the user choose whether or

not to download it.

Depending on the recipient's handset, some files

may not be properly received because of included

file types and sizes.

Sending Receiving

Receive option

Auto receiving

Auto

receive

attach

file

Attach

File

Receive

option

attach file

Message Decomail

picture

Attach

File

Message

Continue on the next page

160

Mail

䂓Deco-mail

You can create and send or receive enjoyable

i-mode mail edited in a decorative manner such as

changing the font size and/or background color or

pasting an image in the text. The many preinstalled

deco-mail pictographs, like emoticons, can be

easily inserted into a mail and be sent. (In the case

of emails sent from a PC, deco-mail pictographs

may not display properly).

If deco-mail is sent to a non-supporting phone or

one with a 10KB download limit, the other party

may receive a mail containing URL. In this case,

the receiver can view the Deco-mail by selecting

the indicated URL.

• Editing/Sending Deco-mail →P162

• Applicable models: Available on Deco-mail

compatible handsets. For details, refer to "Mobile

Phone User's Guide [i-mode]".

SMS (Short Message Service)

You can send/receive text messages using only the

mobile phone numbers without subscription to

i-mode.

Sending →P181䇭Receiving →P181䇭

Checking →P182

SMS (Short Message Service) Destination

SMS destination is "subscribed mobile phone

number".

• For destinations used for sending/receiving SMS to/

from overseas carriers other then DoCoMo, visit

DoCoMo's web site.

Number of Characters That Can be Sent/

Received

The number of characters that can be sent/

received in SMS is as listed below.

When SMS (Short Message Service)

Messages Cannot be Received

SMS delivered to SMS Center will be immediately

sent to your FOMA handset. Note that, however;

when your FOMA handset is OFF or out of service

area, the SMS is stored in SMS Center.

Mail Menu

Displaying Mail Menu

aThe Stand-by displayXDXPerforms

the following operation

[Received mail]

Displays received mail folder list screen.→P170

[Sent mail]

Displays sent mail folder list screen.→P170

[Unsent message

Open the Unsent maillist screen.→P171

[Compose message]

Create a new i-mode mail.→P161

[Check new messages]

Receive i-mode mail stored in i-mode Center by i-mode

check.→P168

[Receive option]

You can check subjects of i-mode mails stored in

i-mode Center and select ones to be received or

deleted without reception from the i-mode Center.

→P167

[SMS]

Compose new SMS and receive SMS stored in SMS

Center by Check new SMS.→P181, P182

[Template]

Show a list of saved templates.→P165

[Mail setting]

Set the mail function.→P179

Receiver 21 characters (including "+")

SMS text

entry

settings

Japanese (70 characters)

English (160 characters)

Note

• The maximum storage period of SMS in SMS

Center is 72 hours. The sender can specify the

storage period within "SMS validity period".→

P182

• SMS expired is automatically deleted.

• SMS stored in SMS Center can be received by

"Check new SMS".→P182

• When SMS stored in SMS Center is received, it

is deleted from SMS Center.

Mail Menu screen

161

Mail

Creating and sending i-mode mail

Creating and Sending

i-mode Mail

aMail menu screen(P160)X"Compose

message"

b(Receiver)Select fieldX"Input

Address"XEnter the address

• Up to 50 half-pitch characters can be entered.

• The address can be selected from the

Phonebook, Sent mail logs and Received mail

logs.→P161

cSelect (Subject) fieldXInput subject

• Up to 15 full-pitch or 30 half-pitch characters

can be entered.

dSelect (Body) fieldXInput body

• Up to 5000 full-pitch or

10000 half-pitch characters

can be entered.

eI[Send]

I-mode Mail Creation Screen Sub Menu

ai-mode mail creation screen(P161)X

M[Menu]XPerform the following

operations

[Send via]

Send mail.

[Preview]

Displays a preview of the sent mail.

[Save]

Save mail being created or edited in Unsent box.

[Add address]

Send to several addresses Up to five addresses can be

added.

[Delete address]

Delete a selected receiver.

X"Yes"

[Cng. rcv. type]

[Template]

Note

• To decorate mail →P163

• To send with attached file →P166

• You can insert a new line feed while editing the

message text. The line feed is counted as

1 full-pitch character.

• A space is counted as 1 half-pitch character.

• Characters may not be sent correctly to the

receiver depending on the radio wave reception

level.

• Half-pitch katakana and pictographs (E-Moji)

except for mail exchanged between i-mode

handsets may not be displayed correctly.

• The secret code is added automatically when

the mail whose address is set with the secret

code is sent. However, the address of the sent

mail does not display the added secret code.

• Even if i-mode mail is sent successfully, an error

message "Transmission failed" appears

depending on the radio wave reception level.

Compose

i-mode mail

screen

Receiver

Subject

Message

Total

number of

bytes of

characters

and

decoration

Mail body input

screen

• When using deco-mail pictograms, the mail is

automatically sent as a deco-mail.

Open

Phonebook

Sent Address

Received

address

Input Address

䋺Select an address from the

phonebook.

XSelect phonebook

䋺Select an address from the Sent mail

logs.

XSelect history

䋺Select an address from the Received

mail logs.

XSelect history

䋺Enter the receiver address directly.

XEnter Mail Address

Change to

Bcc

䋺Change the selected receiver to To. The

mail address entered in usual Receiver

will be shown to recipients.

䋺Change the selected receiver to Cc. You

can specify additional addresses to send

a copy of the same mail to other

recipients in addition to the direct

recipients. The mail addresses entered in

the Cc field will be shown to other

recipients.

• The mail address may not be displayed

depending on the recipient's handset,

device or mail software.

䋺Change the selected receiver to Bcc. You

can specify addresses of people to

receive copies but whose identity will not

be shown to other recipients. The mail

addresses entered in the Bcc field will not

be shown to other recipients.

Load

template

Save

䋺Read a template to create Deco-mail.

→P164

䋺The Deco-mail which you are creating is

saved as a template.

X"Yes"

Continue on the next page

162

Mail

[Attach file]

Play/Display/Delete attached file.→P169

[Activate camera]

[Header/Sign.]

[Delete body]

Body software.

X"Yes"

[Delete Mail]

Delete mail being composed.

X"Yes"

Mail Body Entry Screen Sub Menu

amail body entry screen(P161)XM

[Menu]XPerform the following

operations

[Decorate mail]

Open the palette to select the decoration of Deco-mail

(Decoration).→P163

[Range choice]

Specify the range of text to decorate.

Go to Step 2 (P164) of "Changing Decoration".

• This cannot be selected when no text has been

entered in the message.

[Common phrases]

Enter or edit Common phrases.→P250

[Edit character]

Select a character/decoration in the body and copy/cut/

paste. Undo the last entry or pasting of characters.

→P252

[Edit word]

Edit Dictionary stored in the FOMA handset.→P253

[Quote]

Quote the contents of the phonebook.→P250

[Input setting]

Configure character entry.→P250

[Special input]

Enter Space / Line feeds and Kuten codes.→P250

[Header/Sign.]

[Jump]

[File property]

Display detailed information about the attached file.

[Preview]

Open preview screen of message.

Deco-mail

Creating and Sending

Deco-mail

You can create your own designer mail by adding

decorations such as changing font size, font color

or background color, or inserting images when you

edit i-mode mail messages.

• Deco-mail up to 100KB can be sent.

• 20 deco-mail items with 90KB of data can be

inserted.

• When a Deco-mail is larger than

10KB, other than the following䋪 Deco-mail

compatible handsets will not browse itself but only

URL to refer it.

䋪 : 903i, 904i, 703i (except P703i㱘), 704i model

series

• When a non-compatible i-Mode handset sends a

Deco-mail, the receiving handset sees only a URL.

When a Deco-mail is larger than 10KB, some Deco-

mail incompatible handsets will not browse it but only

URL to refer it, and the other incompatible handsets

will browse only Deco-mail's body text without URL.

aMail menu screen(P160)X"Compose

message"

bEnter the receiver and subject

• Entering the receiver and subject → Step 2 and

3 in "Creating and Sending i-mode Mail" (P161)

Photo Mode

Movie Mode

䋺Capture and attach a still image.

XTake still pictureXC[OK]

䋺Capture and attach a video.

XTake videoXC[OK]

Attach header

Attach Signature䋺Attach set header.

䋺Attach set header.

Note

• When selecting a Phonebook entry with multiple

mail addresses saved, you need to further

specify which addresses are to be added.

<Cng. rcv. type>

• This option is not available when no address is

entered.

• If the text is already entered, a confirmation

screen whether to delete the text opens. To

fetch the template, select "Yes".

header

Signature䋺Attach set header.

䋺Attach set header.

Top

Bottom

䋺Move to the top.

䋺Move to the bottom.

Body Entry

Decoration being set

at the cursor position

163

Mail

cSelect (Body) fieldXM[Menu]

X"Decorate mail"

dUse the palette to decorate a message

text

䂓Selecting a decoration before entering

characters

For operations, see "Decorating the Text"

(P163).

䂓To decorate entered characters

For operations, please see "Changing

Decoration" (P164).

eI[Body]

䂓To view the Deco-mail message

M[Menu] and then select X "Preview"

fC[OK]XI[Send]

Decorating the Text

aMail body entry screen(P161)XM

[Menu]X"Decorate mail"XPerform the

following operations

•I[Body] : Switch from

palette functions to

character entry.

[ (Edit decoration)]

Specify the range of text to decorate.→P164

• This cannot be selected when no text has been

entered in the message.

[ (Clear Decoration)]

Delete Decoration under the cursor.

[(Undo)]

Restores a set decoration to previous setting.

X"Yes"

[ (Font size)]

Set a font size.

X(Large)/ (Standard)/ (Small)

[ (Font color)]

Set a color of characters.

XSelect colorXEnter text

[ (Background color)]

Set a background color of mail text.

XSelect a color

[ (Toggle On/Off)]

Make characters blinking.

X(Blink : Begin)XEnter text

• To stop blink, select (Blink : End).

[(Ticker)]

Set a ticker to the text.

X(Ticker : Begin)XEnter text

• Characters entered between and appear as a

ticker.

• To stop blink, select (Ticker : End).

[(Swing)]

Set text to swing.

X(Swing : Begin)XEnter text

• Characters entered between and appear as a

swing.

• To stop Swing, select (Swing : End).

[ (Word alignment)]

Set a position to enter characters or insert an image.

X(Left)/ (Center)/ (Right)

[ (Insert line)]

Insert a line in mail text.

[ (Insert image)]

[(Copy)]

Specify the range and copy text, an image or line.

XKSelect start point XKSelect end point

Note

• When non-i-mode handsets received

deco-mail, the decorations may not be correctly

displayed.

• After decorated text is deleted, the decoration

codes may remain and this may result in a

reduction in the number of characters available

for the text. Cancel any decoration before

deleting the text. When text is deleted by

pressing Q for 1+ seconds, the text including

any decoration will be deleted.

• If a template contains an image that cannot be

sent by mail, the image may be deleted.

Palette display

screen

Databox

Capturing

Still Images

䋺Insert an image saved in "My picture" to

mail text.

XMove cursor to

folderXC[Open]XSelect Image

䋺Capture and attach a still image.

XTake still pictureXC[OK]

Continue on the next page

164

Mail

[(Cut)]

Specify the range and cut the text, image or line.

XKSelect start point XKSelect end point

[(Paste)]

Paste the copied or cut data after the cursor.

X"Yes"

[ (Copy decoration)]

Copy all decorations set to the line at the cursor.

[ (Paste decoration)]

After copying with "Copy Decoration", you can paste to

where the cursor is.

[ (Reset all)]

Delete all decorations.

X"Yes"

Changing Decoration

aMail body entry screen(P161)XM

[Menu]X"Decorate mail"X

Select (Edit decoration)

bStart selection with K

•I[SelAll] : Select the entire message.

cPress Kto select End point X

Perform the following operation

[ (Clear Decoration)]

Cancel the decoration of the specified range.

[ (Font size)]

Change the size of characters in the specified range.

X(Large)/ (Standard)/ (Small)

[ (Font color)]

Change the color of characters in the specified range.

XSelect a color

[ (blink)]

Blink the characters in the specified range.

X(Blink :Select)

• To cancel blink, select (Blink: End).

[ (Ticker)]

Display the text in the specified range as a ticker from

right to left.

X(Ticker : Select)

• To cancel a ticker, select (Ticker: Reset).

[(Swing)]

Swing the text in the specified range.

X(Swing : Select)

• To cancel swing, select (Swing: Reset).

[ (Word alignment)]

Change the position of characters or an image in the

specified range.

X(Left)/ (Center)/ (Right)

Template

Creating Deco-mail

Using Template

Templates are form data for Deco-mail with

decorations such as the font size and image

insertion already set. In addition to templates pre-

installed, you can use those downloaded from sites.

• Templates pre-installed→P292

Note

• When characters with "Ticker" or "Swing" set

are selected and "Copy" or "Cut" is carried out,

the settings for "Ticker" or "Swing" are not

affected.

• The size of Deco-mail pictographs cannot be

changed.

• Pictographs (E-Moji) are also displayed in the

specified color. To restore the default color,

select "Default" from the color palette.

<Blink>

• If applied, blink is displayed on the preview

screen or the Compose message screen, the

blink ends after a certain period of time.

• A maximum of 90KB and 20 items can be

inserted. The number of attachments possible is

reduced by the file size. If too many are inserted

or the size is too large, a warning message is

displayed.

• By default, they are saved in the "Deco-mail

picture" and "Deco-mail pictogram" folders.

→P292

• If the same image is inserted multiple times, it is

considered that 1 image is inserted.

165

Mail

ai-mode mail screen(P161)XM[Menu]

X"Template"X"Load template"X"YES"

• If the mail has message text entered, the

entered text will be deleted and the template will

be loaded.

Select a template

[Select]

The selected template is inserted in the message

text.

• Selecting a template then pressing J allows

you to select the template while viewing it.

• You can edit the message text after inserting a

template.

Creating a New Template

Create user-defined templates. Created templates

are saved in the "Template" of Mail menu.

aMail Menu Screen(P160)X"Template"

XM[Menu]X"New template"

bComposing Templates

• Decorating operations→P163

cAfter making Template XC[Set]XC

[Select]XEdit File NameXI[Done]

Editing Templates

You can edit user-defined templates.

aMail menu screen(P160)X"Template"

bSelect TemplateXC[Edit]XEdit

template

• Decorating operations→P163

After editing template

XC[Select]X

"Overwrite save"/"New save"

Overwrite

: Save the edited template over the source

template.

Save new entry

: Save the edited template as a new template.

XC[Select]XEdit file name

dI[Done]

Template list screen sub menu

aTemplate list screen(P165)XMove

cursor to templateXM[Menu]X

Perform the following operation

[New template]

Creates a New Template.→P165

[Edit]

Edit the selected template.→P165

[Edit title]

Edit the selected template's title.

XEdit the title

[File property]

Display the selected template's properties.

[Sort]

In some situations, the template can be output

differently.

X"Date asc"/"Date desc"/"Title asc"/"Title desc"

[Delete]

[Memory status]

Show a list of saved templates.

Note

• Undecorated text cannot be saved as a

template.

Template

Creation screen

Template

List screen

Delete

Deletes

selected

item

Delete all

䋺Delete the selected template.

X"Yes"

䋺Selects and deletes a template.

XCheck on the template to be deleted X

I[Done] X "OK"

XCheck off the Template to be

deletedXI[Done]X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], Choose "Mark all" and

"Release all"

䋺Delete all templates.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

166

Mail

Attaching file

Attaching a File

You can send i-mode mail attached with images or

melodies.

• Maximum of 2MB and 10 items can be attached. The

number of attachments possible is reduced by the

file size.

• The following table shows attachable file types:

- Image (JPEG, GIF)

- Video/i-motion Movie

- Melody

- Phonebook

- Schedule

-To Do

- Bookmark

• A file prohibited to be attached to mail or to be output

from FOMA handset cannot be attached.

ai-mode mail creation screen(P161)X

M[Menu]X"Attach file"XPerform the

following operations

[Attach file]

[Del. attach]

Delete the selected attachment.

X"Yes"

[Play/disp file]

Play/display an attached file.

Automatic Reception of Mail

When i-mode Mail is

Received

When the FOMA handset is in the service area,

i-mode mail is automatically sent from i-mode

Center.

aWhen receiving i-mode mail, is

shown at the top of the screen

When the reception is

complete, the Reception

result screen opens.

• You are forced to return to

the screen before

receiving mails if no

operation is performed for

approximately 30

seconds.

• Selecting "Mail" opens the

Received mail folder list screen.

• Until the Detail screen of received i-mode mail

opens, appears at the top of the screen and

(the number indicates the number of

messages) appears on the Stand-by screen.

Image

i-motion

Melody

Phonebook

Calendar

To Do

Bookmark

䋺Select from images saved in "My

picture" of "Data box".

XMove cursor to folderXC[Open]X

Select Image

䋺Select from videos/i-motion movies

saved in "i-motion" of "Data box".

XMove cursor to folderXC[Open]X

Select Image

䋺Select from melodies saved in "Mellody"

of "Data box".

XMove cursor to folderXC[Open]X

Select Melody

䋺Selects an entry in the phonebook.

XSelect phonebook

䋺Select a schedule saved in the FOMA

Handset

X Select the dateX Select the Schedule

event

䋺Select a To Do item saved in the FOMA

Handset.

XSelect To Do

䋺Select bookmarks saved in "Bookmark"

of "i-mode".

X Move cursor to folderXC[Open]X

Select Bookmark

Note

• Attached GIF images and melodies cannot be

received with an i-mode handset using the

mova service.

• A video-clip/i-motion movie over 2MB cannot be

attached. Reduce the size under "Clipping" to

the available size before attaching it.→P203

• Depending on the receiving handset, a video-

clip may be displayed coarsely or as sequential

still images. When sending than to these

devices䋪, the settings below are

recommended.

Size restriction: 500KB,

䋪: 903i, 904i, 703i (except P703iI), 704i

model series

• Some i-motion movies may not be attached.

Note

• When new i-mode mail is delivered, other

i-mode mail and/or Message R/F stored in

i-mode Center are received at the same time.

• When Receive option for i-mode mail has been

set, sent i-mode mail is stored in i-mode Center.

You can confirm a subject, etc. of i-mode mail

stored in Center and select and receive it.

→P167

• If mail is received from a handset that is capable

of setting To, Cc, or Bcc, you can check how the

mail was addressed to you using the FOMA

handset.→P172

• Melodies, video clips and still images can be

received as attachments to i-mode mail.

Incompatible files may be automatically deleted

at the i-mode Center. If an attached file is

deleted, a message "Del. attach" is added.

Reception result

screen

167

Mail

Displaying Newly Received

i-mode Mail

aReceiveResults Screen(P166)X"mail"

XSelect a folder

bSelect mail to be displayed

Receive option

Selecting and Receiving

i-mode Mail

You can confirm a subject, etc. of i-mode mail

stored in i-mode Center and select mail to be

received or delete it in i-mode Center before

reception. To use Receive option, set "Receive

option" to "ON" in advance.

Setting the Receive option

Set "Receive option" to "On" to receive selected i-

mode mail.

aMail menu screen (P160) X"Receive

option" XC[Select] Xselect "On" X

I[Done]

After this option is set, i-mode mail will not be

received automatically.

If i-mode mail arrives when

Receive option is set

aThe Notification of received mail screen

opens

Press C [Select] or Q䋯P

to close the notification screen.

Setting Receive Option for i-mode

Mail

After "Receive option" is set to "On", perform the

following steps to select and receive i-mode mail:

aMail menu screen (P160) X"Receive

option"

• i-mode mails that are less than 100KB (with

attachments included) are automatically

downloaded. Those with attachments greater

than 100KB must be manually downloaded from

the i-mode center.→P169

• You can set whether to receive attached

melodies or images under "Receive attach file".

→P179

• If the size of a received mail exceeds the

number of characters set under "iMenu" →

"English iMenu"→ "Options" → "Mail Settings"

→ "Limit Mail Size", you can download it by

selecting the attached file name and the

destination file name to copy the body text to.

→P169

• Incoming mail is saved at the i-mode Center

when:

- When Power is off

- During Video Call

-During Self mode settings䇭

- When out of service area

- The "Receive option set" is set to "ON"

- The Inbox is full with protected or unread

mail

• When mail remains at the i-mode Center, or

is shown. When power is off or out of service

area, the icons may not be displayed.

• If multiple i-mode mail messages or Message R/

F are received concurrently, the ringtone set to

the i-mode mail or Message R/F received the

last sounds.

Note

• Videos attached to an i-mode mail may not be

properly displayed.

Received Mail

䈍⍮䉌䈞

• Set "Receive option" to "Off" in "Receive option

set" (P179)

Note

• or indicating the incoming i-mode mail

will not be displayed, and the mail ring tone will

not sound.

Receiving

message

screen

168

Mail

For subsequent steps, see "Mobile Phone User's

Guide [i-mode]"

䂓Icons displayed on the Receive option screen

indicating attachments

Check new message

Checking for i-mode

Mails

i-mode mails, if any, that could not be received

because FOMA handset was out of service area or

for other reasons are stored in i-mode Center. You

can receive stored i-mode mails by checking to

i-mode Center.

• appears at the top of the screen when mail is

kept at the i-mode Center.

• You can select items to check (mail or Message

R/F) under "Check new messages" (P180).

• You cannot check from an out of service area.

aMail Menu Screen(P160)X"Check new

message"

When check has completed, the reception result

screen opens.

Replying to i-mode Mail

You can reply to i-mode mail sender. Replying can

be made by entering new text or quoting the text of

received i-mode mail.

aReceived Mail Details Screen(P170)X

M[Menu]X"Reply"X"Reply"/"Reply

quoted"

• You can reply to mail also by pressing I

[Reply] on Received mail detail screen.

• When the mail is sent to receivers other than

your mail address simultaneously, you can

select "Reply all" or "Rep. quoted all".

bEnter subject, body

• "Re:" is added to a subject.

• When replying by quoting, ">" is added to the

beginning of quoted message.

• Editing subject and message → "Creating and

Sending i-mode Mail" (P161).

cI[Send]

Forwarding i-mode Mail

to Another Receiver

You can forward received i-mode mail to another

receiver.

aReceived Mail Details Screen(P170)X

M[Menu]X"Forward"

bEntering Receiver

• "Fw:" is added to a subject.

• Editing subject and message → "Creating and

Sending i-mode Mail" (P161).

cI[Send]

Icon File type

An image is attached.

An i-motion movie is attached.

A melody is attached.

Other file is attached.

Note

• Even with "Receive option set" set to "ON", all

mails are received when "Check new message"

is used. When you do not want to receive mails,

delete "Mail" from the inquiry items.→P180

• Receive option can also be carried out from

"iMenu". Select "iMenu" → "䊜䊆䊠䊷䋯ᬌ⚝

(Menu/Search)" → "䊜䊷䊦ㆬᛯฃା (Receive

Option)".

Note

• Even when i-mode mail is kept at the i-mode

Center, may not appear on the screen if mail

arrived while the FOMA handset power was

turned off.

Note

• After exceeding the storage capacity of the sent

mail BOX, a reply cannot be created. Delete

mails saved in the sent mail BOX before

replying.

• The reply to received Deco-mail with quotation

has original decoration and images entered in

the message text. However, restricted images

and highlighted URLs will not be forwarded.

Note

• When a file that is prohibited from being

attached/distributed from FOMA handset is

attached/pasted to an i-mode mail forward, it is

deleted.

• After exceeding the storage capacity of the sent

mail BOX, a reply cannot be created. Delete

mails saved in sent mail BOX before forwarding.

• The forwarded Deco-mail has original

decoration and images entered in the message

text. However, restricted images and

highlighted URLs will not be forwarded.

169

Mail

Registering Mail

Address/Phone Number

to Phonebook

You can save email addresses/phone numbers in a

mail to the Phonebook.

To register an address/phone number in the

message text

aReceived mail detail screen (P170)X

Movecursorover addresses/numberto

saveXM[Menu]X"Save"X"Add to

Phonebook"

b"Yes"

Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the

Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P80).

When Saving Reciever/Origin mail address/

Phone number

aReceived Mail Details Screen(P170) X

M[Menu] XSelect "Store" X"Store

address"

If there are multiple recipients/senders, further

select the addresses/phone numbers to register.

b"Yes"

Go to Step 2 in "Saving Contacts to the

Phonebook from Received or Dialed Calls" (P80).

Playing/Saving an

Attached File from

i-mode Mail

You can play or save an image, melody, video or

i-motion movie attached or pasted to i-mode mail

Retrieve Selected Attached File

When the size of a received message including

attachments exceeds 100 KB, you will need to

download the attachments from the i-mode Center.

• All the attached files selected are downloaded

regardless of the setting of "Receive attach file"

option in "Mail setting" X "Communication".

• The expired files cannot be downloaded.

aReceived Mail details screen (P170) X

Select filename

Display/Play/Delete Attached File

aReceived mail details screen (P170)

Move the cursor onto the attach file X

Move cursor over attached file

•C[Select] : Display/Play selected attachment.

bM[Menu]X"Attach file"XPerform the

following operations

[Save]

Save the selected attachment.

X"Yes"

• Obtained images will be saved in "i-mode" folder in

"My picture" of the "Data box". (If the image can be

used as a Deco-mail pictogram, it will be saved in

"Deco-mail pictogram".)

• Movies/i-motion movies are saved in the "i-mode"

folder under "i-motion" in the "Databox".

• Obtained melodies will be saved in "i-mode" folder in

"Melody" of the "Data box".

• Phonebook entries are saved to the Phonebook in

the FOMA handset.

• Schedule events are saved to Schedule in the FOMA

handset.

• To Do entries are saved to the To Do 䊥䉴䊃 in the

FOMA handset.

• Obtained bookmarks will be saved in "Bookmark" in

the "i-mode" folder.

• Attached files other than the above cannot be saved.

[View/Play]

Play/Display the selected attachment.

[Delete]

Delete the selected attachment.

X"Yes"

Address

Confirmation

Note

• When there is less empty space in the received

mail BOX than the file size, the attachment

cannot be added.

Note

• i-mode mails too large for the Handset are not

received and an error message is returned to

the source address.

• i-mode mails that are less than 100KB (with

attachments included) are automatically

downloaded. An attachment over 100KB can be

downloaded separately from the i-mode center.

• One can set a size limit for i-mode mail

messages.→P159

• When the image size is larger than the screen,

it is shrunk and displayed.

Continue on the next page

170

Mail

Saving Attached Images

aReceived mail details screen (P170) X

M[Menu]X"Inline image"

bSelect imageXPerform the following

operation

[Save]

Obtained images will be saved in "i-mode" folder in "My

picture" of the "Data box".

X"Yes"

[Inline image]

Display detailed information about the selected image.

Received Mail BOX/Sent Mail BOX / Unsent Mail BOX

Displaying Mail in

Received/Sent/Unsent

Mailbox

• To display contents of a folder with security set,

enter the Security Code.

Displaying Received Mails

• Up to 1000 i-mode mails and SMS can be saved in

the Inbox. However, the savable number depends

on the amount of the data.

• By default, "䊄䉮䊝䈎䉌䈱䈍⍮䉌䈞

(DoCoMo

News)" mails are saved.

aMail menu screen(P160)X"Inbox"

bSelect a Folder

•J: Open the previous or

next page when there are

2 or more pages.

•I[Reply] : Reply to the

sender and/or receivers of

simultaneous mail sending.

→P168

cSelect a message

•J: Open the previous or

next mail.

•I[Reply] : Reply to the

sender and/or receivers of

simultaneous mail sending.

→P168

Displaying Messages in the Outbox

• Up to 500 i-mode mail, SMS, and unsent messages

can be saved in the Outbox. However, the savable

number depends on the amount of the data.

aMail menu screen(P160)X"Outbox"

bSelect a Folder

•J: Open the previous or

next page when there are

2 or more pages.

• Some images, videos/i-motion movies may not

be displayed or played.

• When "Melody auto play" is set to "ON", an

attached melody is played automatically when

you open a received i-mode mail.

• The deriver program is required to play an

i-motion mail on a PC.

Received mail

folder list screen

Note

• If you run an i-appli from the "䊄䉮䊝䈎䉌䈱䈍⍮

䉌䈞

Announcement from DoCoMo",

communication charges apply.

Received mail list

Received Mail

Details Screen

Sent mail folder

list screen

Sent mail list

171

Mail

cSelect a message

•J : Open the previous or

next mail.

•I[Edit] : Open Compose

message or SMS creation

screen.→P161, P181

Displaying Messages in Unsent

Message

• Messages saved in the Unsent Mail BOX are

included in the maximum number of savable

messages in the Outbox.

aMail menu screen(P160)X"Unsent

message"

•I

[Delete] : Delete i-mode

mail

or SMS.

bSelect a message

The i-mode mail or SMS creation screen opens

depending on the type of the selected mail. You

can also edit unsent mail.

Auto sort

Sorting Sent/Received Mails

Automatically to Folders

Set conditions for automatically saving mails in

specified folders.

• This option is not available with the default "Inbox"

and "Outbox".

Received mail folderList Screen(P170)/

Sent Mail Folder List Screen (P170)X

Select FolderXM[Menu]X"Auto

sort"

•I[Phonebook] : Settings for selecting mail

address from Phonebook.

bM[Menu]XPerform the following

operations

[Address]

Set mail address as a sort keys. You can specify more

than one mail address.

[Subject]

Set a mail subject as a condition.

XEnter subject

[Reply invalid]䋪

Route messages with Reply impossible to the selected

folder.

[Switch view]

Select a view to display the condition of "Auto sort"

setting.

[Release]

䋪䋺 This icon is not displayed for the sent BOX

Sent Mail Details

Screen

Unsent mail list

screen

Open

Phonebook

Sent Address

Received

address

Input Address

䋺Select and set from a phonebook.

XSelect phonebook

䋺Select an address from the sent

mail logs.

XSelect history

䋺Select an address from the

received mail logs.

XSelect history

䋺Directly enter and set a mail

address.

XEnter Mail Address

Name display

Address display

䋺Display name saved to phonebook.

䋺Display mail address.

Delete

Release

selected

Unmark

all

䋺Delete the selected Auto sort rule.

X"Yes"

䋺Select and delete the auto-sort rule.

XCheck off the rules to be

deletedXI"Done"X"Yes"

•Press

M[Menu], choose from "Mark

all", "Release all", "Switch view"

䋺Delete all rules set to the selected folder.

X"Yes"

Note

• You cannot set the multiple conditions such as

"Address", "Subject", and "Reply impossible" to

a folder concurrently.

• The same sorting conditions as ones set to

another folder cannot be set.

172

Mail

Reading Received/Sent/Unsent

Mail Screen

Received/Sent Mail Folder List Screen

aFolder name

bUnread Mail count

Displays on the Received Mail Folder List

screen.

䂓Icons displayed on the Received/Sent screen

Received Mail List Screen/Received Mail

Detail Screen

aDisplayed folder name

bReceived date and time

On the Received mail list screen, messages

received before today have the date displayed,

and messages received today have the time

displayed.

cSender's phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in

the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook

appears.*

*䋺When the name is set to appear in "Switch

view" → P171

dSubject

"SMS" is displayed on an SMS message.

eAddress types and Simultaneous Receivers

If you send a mail to simultaneous receivers,

their address types (To, CC) are displayed. If

the mail address is saved in the Phonebook,

the name in the Phonebook appears.

䂓Icons displayed on the Received mail list screen/

Received mail detail screen

䋪䋺 If details screen's display differs, the difference is

enclosed in ( ).

Icon Description

(Grey) "Inbox"/"Outbox" (Default save folders)

(Blue) User composer folder

Auto sort

Security is set

Ex: Received Mail Folder List

Received Mail

List Screen Received Mail

Details Screen

Icon Description

䋯䋯 Unread i-mode mail/SMS/SMS

report request

䋯䋯 Unread i-mode mail/SMS/SMS

report request

Replies Only

Forward Only

Sender's mail address which

can not reply

䋯Invalid simultaneous receivers

address which can not reply

Protected.

䋯Unread/read SMS saved in UIM

Received date and time

Different-Timezone SMS

received

䋨䋩 Melody is attached.

䋨䋩 The Mail body can trigger an

i-appli

䋯䋯䋯

䋨䋯䋯䋯

䋯䋯䋯䋩

Melody/Still Image/Video/

Phone book/schedule/

Bookmark/other file is attached.

Attaches multiple copies of the

same file.

䋨䋩 Damaged file.

䋨䋩 Deleted attached file(Ex. case

of still image file)

䋨䋩 Not received attached file(Ex.

case of still image file)

䋨䋩 Attached file which is canceled

on the way of receiving (Ex.

case of still image file)

䋨䋩 Attached file which is failed to

obtain

Files in multiple types are

pasted or attached.

䋨䋩 Attachment with UIM operation

restriction activated

Subject

䋯䋯 The message was received

from the sender as To, Cc, or

Bcc

䋯Simultaneous receivers

address type other than own

address as (To/Cc)

173

Mail

Outbox List Screen/Outbox Detail Screen

aDisplayed folder name

bSent date and time

On the Outbox list screen, messages sent

before today have the date displayed, and

messages sent today have the time displayed.

cRecipient's phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in

the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook

appears.*

䋪䋺 When the name is set to appear in "Switch

view" → P174

dSubject

"SMS" is displayed on an SMS message.

eReceiver type

Indicate the receiver type of the received mail

(To, Cc, or Bcc).

䂓Icons displayed on the Outbox list screen/

Outbox detail screen

䋪䋺 If details screen's display differs, the difference is

enclosed in ( ).

Unsent Mail List Screen

aSaved date and time

Messages saved before today have the date

displayed, and messages saved today have the

time displayed.

bSubject

"SMS" is displayed on an SMS message.

cRecipient's phone number/mail address

If the phone number or mail address is saved in

the Phonebook, the name in the Phonebook

appears.*

䋪䋺 When the name is set to appear in "Switch

view" → P174

䂓Icons displayed on the Unsent mail list screen

䋪 Other than the above, it is the same as sent mail.

Received Mail Folder/Sent Mail Folder List

Screen Sub Menu

Received mail folder list screen(P170)/

Sent mail folder list screen (P170)X

M[Menu]XPerform following

operation

[Manage folders]

Icon Description

䋯(䋯)Sent i-mode mail or SMS

i-mode mail sent to many

recipients

Send failed

Mails that failed to send to

multiple recipients

Protected.

SMS saved in UIM

Received date and time

䋨䋩 Melody is attached.

䋨䋩 The Mail body can trigger an

i-appli

䋯䋯䋯䋯

䋯䋯

䋨䋯䋯䋯䋯

䋯䋯䋩

Melody/Still Image/Video/

Phone book/schedule/

Bookmark/other file is attached.

Attaches multiple copies of the

same file.

䋨䋩 Attachment with UIM operation

restriction activated

Subject

䋯䋯 Send by To/Cc/Bcc

Sent mail

list screen Sent Mail

Details Screen

Icon Description

Unsent i-mode mail

Unsent SMS

Create

folder 䋺Create a folder.

XEnter folder name

Edit folder name

䋺Edit selected folder name.

XEnter folder name

Sort folder 䋺Select the display position of the

folders and sort folders.

Select the position

Folder security

䋺Set or release security to the selected

folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Unsent mail

list screen

174

Mail

[Delete]

[Auto sort]

Set mails to save them automatically in specified

folders.→P171

[Send all via IrDA]

Transmit all mail in Received mail folder/sent mail

folder via infrared.

XEnter security codeXEnter Auth. Password X

"Yes"

[Copy all microSD]

Copies all messages in the selected folder to the

microSD memory card.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

[Memory status]

Display number of mails in Received mail folder/sent

mail.

[Open folder]

Display contents of a selected folder.

䋪䋺 This icon is not displayed for the sent BOX

Received Mail List Screen Sub Menu

aReceived mail list screen(P170)XMove

cursor to mailXM[Menu]XPerform

the following operation

[Move]

[Delete]

[View settings]

Delete Folder

䋺Delete selected folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Delete all read

䋪

䋺Deletes all read messages in the

folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Deletes folder contents

䋺Deletes all messages in the selected

folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Note

• If I[Add] is pressed at the received mail

folder/sent mail folder list screen, a folder can

be added.

<Edit folder name/Sort folders/Delete folder/

Auto sort>

• This option is not available with the default

"Inbox" and "Outbox" folders.

• A folder containing protected mails cannot be

deleted.

• Protected mails or SMS saved in UIM are not

deleted.

• If "Delete one" is selected for a folder with

unread mail, there will be a confirmation prompt

asking permission to continue. Select "Yes" to

delete.

Move

this

Move

selected

Move all

䋺Move the displayed mail to another folder.

XSelect destination folder

䋺Select mail messages and move them to

another folder.

X Check off the mail to move XI

[Done]X Select destination folder

䋺Move all mail in the folder to another folder.

XSelect destination folder

Delete

Deletes

selected item

Del all read

Delete all

SMS rmv. in fd.

䋺Delete the selected message.

X"Yes"

䋺Select and delete message.

XCheck off the mail to

deleteXI[Done]X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], choose from

"Mark all", "Release all", "Switch

view"

䋺Deletes all read messages in the

folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

䋺Delete all mails in the folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

䋺Deletes all SMS reports in the folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Switch

View

Sort

䋺Set how to display mail.

X"1 lines subjt"/"1 lines add"/"1 lines name"/

"2 lines add"/"2 lines name"

䋺Sort mails by the condition you specify.

X"Subject asc"/"Subject desc"/"Address

asc"/"Address desc"/"Date asc"/"Date

desc"/"Size asc"*/"Size desc"*

䋪䋺 Sort mails in ascending order of data

size.

175

Mail

[Filter]

Shows messages that meet certain conditions.

[Read all]

Mark all mail in the folder as read.

X"Yes"

[Protect on/off]

[Send Ir data]

[Copy to microSD card]

[FOMA card (UIM)]

[Memory status]

Display number of mails in Received mail BOX.

Received Mail Detail Screen Sub Menu

aScreen Memo details screen (P170)X

M[Menu]XPerform the following

operations

[Reply]

Reply to the viewed mail.→P168

[Forward]

Forward a the viewed mail→P168

[Move]

Move the displayed mail to another folder.

XSelect destination folder

[Delete]

Delete a displayed mail.

X"Yes"

[Protect on/off]

Protect or release the displayed mail.

X"Yes"

[Store]

Save the phone numbers and email addresses in the

displayed mail to Phonebook.→P169

[Attach file]

Save, play or view, or delete images attached to the

displayed mail.→P169

[Inline image]

Save images contained in the displayed mail or view

the information.→P170

Address

Subject

Unread

Read

Protected

Not protected

Image

i-motion

Melody

Mail

SMS

All

䋺Only display mails with a particular

address

XSelect itemXSelect/input address

䋺Display mail with a specific subject.

XEnter subject

䋺Only display unread mails.

䋺Only display read mails.

䋺Display protected mail.

䋺Display unprotected mail.

䋺Display mail with an image attached.

䋺

Display mail with an i-motion movie

attached.

䋺Display mail with a melody attached.

䋺Display i-mode mail.

䋺Only display SMS, SMS Report.

䋺Display all mail in the folder.

Protect On/Off

Protect

selected on/

off

Protect all

Protect all on/

off

䋺Protect or unprotect the selected mail.

X"Yes"

䋺Select and protect or unprotect mail.

XCheck off the mail to

protectXI[Done]X"Yes"

•Press

M[Menu], choose from

"Mark all", "Release all", "Switch

view"

䋺Protect all mail in the folder.

X"Yes"

䋺Unprotect all mail in the folder.

X"Yes"

Send

Send all

data

䋺Sends selected mail via Infrared.

X"Yes"

䋺Send all mail in the folder by infrared.

XEnter security codeXEnter Auth.

Password X"Yes"

Copy one

Copy all

䋺Copies selected mail to microSD memory

card.

X"Yes"

䋺Copies all mail in folder to microSD

memory card.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Copy to UIM

䋺

Copy the selected SMS to the UIM.

Move to UIM䋺

Move the selected SMS to the UIM.

Copy from

UIM

Move from

UIM

䋺Copy the

selected

SMS to the

handset.

䋺Move the

selected

SMS to the

handset.

Note

• If there are unread messages, user is prompted

to confirm deletion. Select "Yes" to delete.

• Addresses matched completely and subjects

matched even partially are displayed.

Continue on the next page

176

Mail

[View settings]

[Copy]

Copy contents of the displayed mail.

[Save template]

Save Deco-mail as a template.

XC[Select]XEdit titleXI[Done]

[Export]

Sent Mail List Screen Sub Menu

aSent mail list screen(P170)XMove

cursor to mailXM[Menu]XPerform

the following operation

[Edit]

Edit and send a sent mail.→P161, P181

[Move]

[Delete]

[View settings]

Scroll

Character Size

䋺Sets the number of lines scrolled

when H is pressed at the mail

Display Screen.

X"1 line"/"3 lines"/"5 lines"/"Page"

䋺Set a font size for text on mail display

screen.

X"Small"/"Standard"/"Large"

Message

Subject

Address

䋺

Select and copy contents of text.

→P252

䋺Copy a subject.

䋺Copy a destination. If there are multiple

addresses, select an address from the mail

address list screen.

Send IrDA 䋺Send the displayed mail via IrDA.

X"Yes"

Copy to microSD

䋺

Copy the displayed mail to the microSD

memory card.

X"Yes"

FOMA card (UIM)

䋺:Copy or move the selected SMS to

the UIM, or copy or move the selected

SMS from the UIM to the handset.

X"Copy to UIM"/"Move to UIM"/"Move

from UIM"/"Copy from UIM"

Note

• Up to 1000 mails can be protected.

• Protected mails cannot be deleted.

Move

this

Move

selected

Move all

䋺Move the selected mail to another folder.

XSelect destination folder

䋺Select mail messages and move them to

another folder.

X Check off the mail to move XI

[Done]X Select destination folder

䋺Move all mail in the folder to another folder.

XSelect destination folder

Delete

Deletes

selected

item

Delete

all

䋺Delete the selected message.

X"Yes"

䋺Select and delete message.

XCheck off the mail to

deleteXI[Done]X"Yes"

• Press M[Menu], choose from "Mark

all", "Release all", "Switch view"

䋺Delete all mails in the folder.

XEnter the security codeX"Yes"

Switch

View

Sort

䋺Set how to display mail.

X"1 lines subjt"/"1 lines add"/"1 lines name"/

"2 lines add"/"2 lines name"

䋺Sort mails by the condition you specify.

X"Subject asc"/"Subject desc"/"Address

asc"/"Address desc"/"Date asc"/"Date desc"/

"Size asc"*/"Size desc"*

䋪䋺 Sort mails in ascending order of data

size.

LG Electronics USA L705I PCS GSM Phone User Manual

LG Electronics USA PCS GSM Phone

Contents

Users Manual 1

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation